Canon IMAGERUNNER ADVANCE C5045 Service Manual Download Page 377

Page: 377 / 1131

6-7

Troubleshootingitems

Troubleshootingitemslist

Summary of Contents for IMAGERUNNER ADVANCE C5045

Page 1: ... ADVANCE C5051 C5045 C5035 C5030 Series Service Manual September 24 2009 Revision 0 Product Outline Function Periodic Servicing Parts Replacing and Cleaning Adjustments Troubleshooting Error Code Service Mode Installation Appendix ...

Page 2: ...nformation as the need arises In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period Canon will issue a new edition of this manual The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies ...

Page 3: ...s the direction of the electric signal The expression turn on the power means flipping on the power switch closing the front door and closing the delivery unit door which results in supplying the machine with power 2 In the digital circuits 1 is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is High while 0 is used to indicate Low The voltage value however differs from circuit to circui...

Page 4: ...Act Laser Safety Handling of Laser System Turn power switch ON Safety of Toner Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery Notes Before Servicing imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051 5045 5035 5030 Series Safety Precautions ...

Page 5: ...IS PRODUCT CONHORMS WITH DHHS RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARD 21CFR CHAPTER 1 SUBCHAPTER J A different description may be used for a different product Laser Safety Laser beam radiation may pose a danger to the human body A laser scanner mounted on the machine is sealed with the protection housing and external cover to prevent the laser beam from leaking to the outside The laser beam never leaks out...

Page 6: ...r The machine s toner is a non toxic material made of plastic iron and small amounts of dye Do not throw toner into fire It may cause explosion Toner on Clothing or Skin If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner wipe it off with tissue then wash it off with water Do not use warm water which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the fibers of the cloth Tonner is eas...

Page 7: ...G TO THE INSTRUCTIONS The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles EN60950 Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt besteht Explosionsgefahr Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung beseitigen Notes Before Servicing At servicing be sure to turn OFF the power source according to the specified steps and disconnect the power plug ...

Page 8: ...1 1 Product Overview Product Lineup Feature Specifications Name of Parts ...

Page 9: ...5ppm 30 30ppm Positioning High speed high quality Middle Office model Target machine iRC5180 4580 3880Series Cost prioritized Standard Office model Target machine iRC3380 2880Series iRC6800Series iRC3100Series F 1 1 F 1 1 T 1 1 T 1 1 T 1 2 T 1 2 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C50 51 A Product category 90 Production model 50 Office model B Print speed unit is ppm print per minutes A B F 1 2 F 1 2 ...

Page 10: ...ader 7 Printer Cover C1 8 Copy Tray J1 9 Cassette Heater Unit 32 Deck Heater for Paper Deck Unit B1 10 Paper Deck Unit B1 11 Envelope Feeder Attachment D1 Cassette Attachment for envelope 12 FL Cassette AG1 13 FL Cassette AH1 14 Cassette Heater Unit 37 Cassette Heater for host machine 2 Cassette Pedestal AD1 15 Cassette Feeding Unit AD1 16 Buffer Pass Unit G1 17 Inner 2Way Tray F1 For host machine...

Page 11: ...16 Super G3 FAX Board AE1 17 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board AE1 1 line FAX board is required 18 Super G3 3rd 4th Line Fax Board AE1 1 line FAX board additional 2nd line FAX Board is required 19 imagePASS B1 20 IPSec Board B2 PCI bus expansion kit F1 is required 21 Wireless LAN Board B1 22 Signal Interface Kit A1 23 Serial Interface Kit K1 24 PCL Printer Kit AE1 Direct Print Kit for PDF XPS H1 Barcode...

Page 12: ... Drum Highly durable drum is High speed support High speed support Low running cost High image quality High image quality High image quality Unit are separated adopted BK only is adopted adopted F 1 5 F 1 5 Features at servicing Improvement on upgrade operation It is possible to upgrade options through the host machine Same as conventional way use SST service support tool to upgrade New type conne...

Page 13: ... paper Coater paper Labels paper Washi paper Transparency film Tab Paper size upper cassette B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5R LGL LTRR LTR EXEC Custom size Min 139 7mm x 182mm to Max 304 8mm x 390mm K8 K16 K16R Paper size lower cassette A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5R 12 18 305mm 457mm 11 x 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR EXEC Custom size Min 139 7mm x 182mm to Max 304 8mm x 457 2mm K8 K16 K16R Envelope COM10 Monarch DL ISO B5...

Page 14: ...09 20 0 15 5 20 15 5 210 256 T 1 6 T 1 6 Size Mode Paper type Paper basis weight g m2 ImageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051 C5045 Cassette Multi purpose tray Cassette Multi purpose tray Color B W Color B W Color B W Color B W A3 LDR 1 sided Plain paper 52 81 25 5 19 5 25 5 19 5 82 105 25 5 19 5 25 5 19 5 Thick paper 105 163 12 5 9 8 12 5 9 8 164 209 10 0 9 8 10 0 9 8 210 256 6 5 6 5 2 sided Plain paper 52 81 ...

Page 15: ... 7 Irregular size 5 487 8 to 630 0 139 7 to 330 2 T 1 9 T 1 9 Pickup Paper type g m2 Size Multi purpose tray Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette Feeding Unit 1 Cassette Feeding Unit 2 Paper Deck Plain 1 52 to 81 Thin Recycled Pre Punched Color Plain 2 82 to 105 Bond Heavy 1 106 to 163 Textured Heavy 2 164 to 209 Labels Tab A4 LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes B4 A4R A5R B5 B5R EXEC LGL LTRR STMTR 16K 16KR Ye...

Page 16: ...Irregular size 2 3 Irregular size 2 4 Irregular size 3 1 Irregular size 3 2 Irregular size 3 3 Irregular size 3 4 Irregular size 4 1 Irregular size 4 2 Irregular size 4 3 Irregular size 4 4 Irregular size 5 Yes No No No No No Postcard A6 irregular Yes No No No No No Envelope COM10 Monarch ISO C5 ISO B5 DL Yes No Yes No No No When Envelope Feeder Attachment D1 is installed T 1 10 T 1 10 Name of Par...

Page 17: ... 2 side delivery lower roller 36 Laser scanner unit M Y 7 Second third delivery entrance roller 22 Registration roller 37 Developing unit Bk Drum unit Bk 8 2 side entrance roller 23 Bypass feeding roller 38 Developing unit C Drum unit C 9 Primary delivery roller 24 Bypass pick up roller 39 Developing unit M Drum unit M 10 Primary delivery flapper 25 Bypass separration roller 40 Developing unit Y D...

Page 18: ...estore it to normal mode 3 Environment Heater Switch Environment Heater Switch is to supply and shut the power to Cassette Heater and Reader Heater F 1 8 F 1 8 How to turn ON OFF the power and points to note While progress bar is kept displayed at power on HDD access is processing thus never turn OFF the Main Power Switch To turn off the power turn off the Main Power Switch Conventional shutdown s...

Page 19: ...Brightness Adjustment Dial 4 Counter Check Key 12 FAX Volume Adjustment Key 5 Operation Pen 13 Status Check Stop Key 6 Main Power Lamp 14 Custom Menu Key 7 Error Lamp 15 Main Menu Key 8 Execution Memory Lamp F 1 9 F 1 9 Main Menu iR ADVANCE C5051 5045 5035 5030 Series Scan and Send Fax I Fax Inbox 3 4 2 1 7 8 6 5 9 1 Copy 6 Secured Print 2 Scan and Send 7 Scanner 3 Scan and Store 8 Set Regi Short ...

Page 20: ... Preferences Adjustment Maintenance Function Settings Set Destination TOP OK 1 1 Management Settings 1 2 3 4 5 1 Preferences 4 Set Destination 2 Adjustment Maintenance 5 Management Settings 3 Function Settings Difference of Settings Registration menu iRC 3380 2880 Series iR ADVANCE C5151 5045 5035 5030 Series Common Settings Preferences Timer Settings Adjustment Cleaning Adjustment Maintenance Sys...

Page 21: ...ELIST CLASSIC mode When MODELIST or MODELIST CLASSIC is pressed initial screen of each mode is displayed F 1 12 F 1 12 Description display of service mode item Enables to display the description of initial screen large category middle category and small category Select any from initial screen large category middle category small category and press i information button so that the description of se...

Page 22: ...Press the button Which button to press will depend on which electrical parts intended and its device classification For instance if the host machine uses paper pass detection sensor then press the button on the COPIER and P Sensor position Device classification Electrical parts classification 2 Then the selected electrical parts classification s mark name port number and 0 1 content will appear 3 ...

Page 23: ...aser latent image related Image related reader ADF IMG RDR Reader ADF image related Image related controller others IMG MCON MN CON image related and image related items other than above Image quality copy speed IMG SPD Down sequence Cleaning CLEANING Cleaning of Charging Assembly Drum Transfer Roller ITB etc Environment settings ENV SET Temperature Humidity Environment Heater due condensation log...

Page 24: ...Test Option Adjust I O i Function Display DC CON 43 44 00 52 4C 50 44 46 54 53 42 4E 4E 4D LANG DA LANG EL LANG ES LANG ET LANG HU LANG FI LANG KO VERSION READY LEVEL 2 1 2 Counter Test Option Adjust I O i Function Display LANG CS 53 43 41 44 4C 45 53 45 54 45 49 46 55 48 4F 4B F 1 16 F 1 16 ...

Page 25: ...2 2 Technology Basic Configuration Controller System Laser Exposure System Image Formation System Fixing System Pickup Feed System MEAP Embedded RDS ...

Page 26: ... system F 2 1 F 2 1 Basic sequence Sequence at Power On Reader Reader Motor Scanning Lamp HP Sensor SSTBY SREADY Backwarding Forwarding Optical unit position HP Shading position Gain correction Offset correction Backwarding Forwarding Shift shading Fixing shading White plate dust detection control Shading correction HP Shading position Main power switch ON Printer Unit WMUP WMUPR PSTBY Fixing heat...

Page 27: ...uence Reader Start Key ON Reader Motor Scanning Lamp HP Sensor SSTBY SSTBY SREADY SCRW SCFW Backwarding Optical unit position End of the image Forwarding Backwarding Forwarding Forwarding HP Shading HP Shading Stream reading position ON ON Forwarding Backwarding Forwarding Backwarding Printer disengage Fixing heater H3 Fixing motor M21 Target temperature The following adjustments to work depending...

Page 28: ...ON turning the main power OFF PSTBY Print Standby State An interval in which the copy print request signal can be accepted PRINTR Printer Intial Rotation An interval between the reception of the print request signal and the state the image signal is sent PRINT An interval in which all toner is transferred on the paper and the paper is delivered LSTR Last Rotation An interval between the completion...

Page 29: ...M PCB To generate and save encryption key Available only when TPM settings is ON Management Settings Data Management TPM Settings default OFF Not available with China models Main controller PCB 2 CPU 400 MHz Image control Various image processing color space conversion enlarge reduction rotation composition compression rasterizing resolution conversion image binarization delay memory control betwe...

Page 30: ...0MHz Rasterizing rendering resolution conversion coding decoding DDR2 SDRAM M0 512 MB standard Op clock frequency 200MHz Product name Additional Memory Type B 512MB Rasterizing rendering resolution conversion coding decoding To be used when using the following options PS Printer Kit AE1 Direct Print Kit for PDF XPS H1 imagePASS B1 ColorPASS GX300 DDR2 SDRAM P 512 MB standard clock frequency 200MHz...

Page 31: ...S B1 ColorPASS GX300 Op J1026 I F for control interface kit Op J1027 I F for card reader I F for serial interface kit I F for coin manager all Op J1019 Riser PCB I F 1 There is 1 port on the control panel as well F 2 11 F 2 11 T 2 6 T 2 6 Main controller PCB 2 E Ex xt te er rn na al l I I F F I In nt te er rn na al l I I F F Reader FAX 1 line FAX USB 2 4 line J14 J1010 J3003 J1000 J17 J16 Bypass I...

Page 32: ...oard B1 Expansion Bus F1 is required Only for non Japanese models Parallel use with imagePASS B1 ColorPASS GX300 is NOT available IPSec PCB Encryption composition processing of packet data Product name IPSec Board B2 Expansion Bus F1 is required Parallel use with imagePASS B1 ColorPASS GX300 is NOT available F 2 13 F 2 13 T 2 8 T 2 8 Main controller PCB 2 Open I F PCB b u s B C P k n i l F n i a m...

Page 33: ...er Box Universal data temporary file For PDL spooling FAX data Address book filter MEAP application Universal data MEAP saving data System log Text management table PDL related file font registration form etc Job archiving chasing System software System language RUI etc Thumbnail For Advanced Box For distribution server F 2 15 F 2 15 Boot sequence Starting BIOS Main controller PCB 1 Starting IPL O...

Page 34: ... 2010 IPL Initial Program Loader is not found 2011 OS is not found T 2 10 T 2 10 Shutdown sequence Before turning OFF the main power switch it is necessary to perform HDD completion processing to prevent damage on the HDD cooling of the internal printer to prevent fixed toner due to high temperature and exhaust to prevent smeared image due to chemical reaction of ozone in the machine and photosens...

Page 35: ... 2 17 F 2 17 F 2 18 F 2 18 SEND Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 2 Riser PCB HDD Reader Image processing Resolution conversion Image rotation JPEG compression extension Image data buffer memory Data conversion Tile raster conversion JPEG encode HDD writing reading Network LAN Controller Box Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 2 Riser PCB FAX Image data buffer memory HDD Image proces...

Page 36: ...et registered saved data other than the security information is not protected F 2 21 F 2 21 To encrypt or decode the security information use the TPM key installed in the chip Encryption key for password Public key for SSL communication User certificate TPM PCB HDD SRAM It is extremely difficult from the outside to take out the TPM key installed in the chip Therefore even the following cases occur...

Page 37: ...is faulty Remedy Mount the appropriate TPM PCB Replace with a new TPM PCB F 2 23 F 2 23 Before after introduction The setting needs to be specified in Settings Registration mode TPM setting is set OFF at the time of shipment from the factory 1 Enable the feature 2 Backup the TPM key 3 Restore the TPM key 4 Disable the feature Basically the user should perform this work Caution To set ON for TPM se...

Page 38: ...achine Encryption decoding feature of security information is enabled after rebooting the machine F 2 24 F 2 24 F 2 25 F 2 25 2 Backup of TPM key Only the USB memory supported system file FAT32 can be used as the device for saving backup file of TPM key Data size of this file is several MB 1 Connect the USB memory to the main unit There are two USB I F host one at the side of the control panel and...

Page 39: ... cause Be sure to perform appropriate remedy USB memory is not connected 2 or more USB memories are connected Memory capacity of USB memory is insufficient Connected USB memory is read only writing is prohibited There is no key Caution Storage of USB memory Be sure to instruct the following points to the user The USB memory should be securely kept managed Do not put the backup file of TPM key stor...

Page 40: ...start restore 5 Once the restore completion screen is shown click OK and remove the USB memory and turn OFF and then ON the main power switch F 2 30 F 2 30 Caution Cause of restore failure In the case of the following a message is shown indicating restore failure and its cause Be sure to perform appropriate remedy USB memory is not connected 2 or more USB memories are connected Connected USB memor...

Page 41: ...yption of BOX backup SRAM Password of SMB server for BOX backup SRAM Password for FAX Box HDD Super BOX Password for backup of Advanced Box SRAM Password of SMB server for backup of Advanced Box SRAM Send Password for File destination in Address Book HDD Password of LDAP server SRAM Password of POP3 server SRAM Password for PDF with time stamp SRAM Password of Adobe ES Rights Management server SRA...

Page 42: ...GB it requires 20 of snapshot area and the data area to be used for internal processing in the system Therefore 114GB can be actually used for text storage area F 2 32 F 2 32 HDD mirroring feature option This option enables mirroring of HDD data RAID1 In the case of failure in one HDD the operation is performed with the other HDD This feature minimizes downtime as well as improves reliability as t...

Page 43: ... minutes Install the mirroring PCB and LED PCB for HDD1 HDD1 is connected to Ch A on the mirroring PCB HDD2 is connected to Ch B on the mirroring PCB Slot 2 HDD2 Slot 1 HDD1 CH B CH A Slot 2 HDD2 Slot 1 HDD1 CH B CH A F 2 35 F 2 35 Rebuild progress is shown in a massage at the status line on the control panel Copying hard disk data xx MEMO This machine can be used even during rebuild process opera...

Page 44: ... out A lighting up B blinking Status HDD 1 Ch A HDD 2 Ch B Green LED Red LED Green LED Red LED At normal operation During access with HDD1 A During access with HDD2 A HDD1 is faulty A HDD2 is faulty A During data copy to HDD1 rebuild A B A During data copy to HDD1 rebuild A A B F 2 36 F 2 36 T 2 13 T 2 13 Removable HDD option With this option users can easily install or remove the HDD slot in out ...

Page 45: ...Second delivery tray Second Delivery Sensor PS42 Third delivery tray Third Delivery Sensor PS43 2 In case finisher is installed Finisher Delivery Sensor T 2 14 T 2 14 Fan Overview Fan Layout Process cartridge fan front FM10 Fixing cooling fan front FM5 Delivery fan 2 FM9 Process cartridge fan rear FM4 Power supply cooling fan FM3 Fixing heat exhaust fan 2 FM2 Fixing heat exhaust fan 1 FM1 Controll...

Page 46: ...ivery Fan 1 Preventing delivery paper adhesion E806 0000 FM8 Secondary Transfer Delivery Fan Heat exhaustion around Secondary Transfer Unit E806 0002 FM9 Delivery Fan 2 Preventing delivery paper adhesion E806 0001 FM10 Process Cartridge Fan front Heat exhaustion around Process Cartridge E807 0001 FM11 Controller Fan 1 Cooling down of Controller FM12 Controller Fan 2 Cooling down of Controller FM13...

Page 47: ...2 2 2 23 2 23 Air flow of fixing system F 2 40 F 2 40 Air flow around the operation system F 2 41 F 2 41 ...

Page 48: ...rear Secondary Transfer Exhaust Fan Post rotation Process Cartridge Fan front Fan name Reader Low power Sleep Pre rotation Initial rotation Stand by Copy pint Jam error F 2 42 F 2 42 F 2 43 F 2 43 Power Supply Control Power supply inside the printer Reader heater Drum heater Cassette heater Cassette pedestal heater Deck heater Fixing heater Right switch TP Leakage breaker AC interlock switch Main ...

Page 49: ...ader Controller PCB 24V 5V DADF driver PCB F 2 45 F 2 45 Power connection with each option Reader ADFUnit Paper Deck Unit B1 Staple Finisher C1 Cassette Feeding Unit AD1 Built in wiring Connector inside the cover is used for the connection with DADF Unit and the 2 Cassette Pedestal External Cable is used for the connection with the Side Paper Deck and the Finisher F 2 46 F 2 46 ...

Page 50: ...enter Sleep Standby but enters Sleep1 mode Standby In this mode the machine is either operating or ready to start operation immediately and all power is supplied Sleep Standby or Sleep1 Control panel is turned OFF Power supply other than the control panel is the same with Standby mode Deep Sleep 3V for all night power PCB is only supplied Print job is submitted The machine moves to Sleep Standby o...

Page 51: ...djust Main Controller PCB 1 Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB Main Controller PCB 2 Backup of the set registered data Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB Restoring the backup data TPM PCB When TPM setting is ON Restoring the TPM key Consumables No Parts Name Parts number Qty Execution timing Remark 1 Toner filter FC6 9817 1 100k B W 25k CL Points to note at servicing N A T ...

Page 52: ... Driver PCB C UN15 Laser Driver PCB Bk UN14 BD Sensor Y M Laser Driver PCB Y UN13 Laser Driver PCB M UN12 Scanner Mirror Scanner Mirror Laser Scanner Unit 1 This machine emits the laser to the image area on the drum negatively charged Non image area Image area Non image area Laser ON Enlarged view F 2 48 F 2 48 F 2 49 F 2 49 Y M C Bk Imaging Lens Imaging Lens Imaging Lens Reflection Mirror Reflect...

Page 53: ... beam for each color Resolution 1200dpi Motor type Brushless motor Number of motor rotation imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051 C5045 Approx 29100rpm imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035 C5030 Approx 37800rpm Number of scanner mirror facet 6 facet phi 40 Control list Laser ON OFF control Horizontal scanning synchronous control Vertical scanning synchronous control APC control Laser scanner motor control BD correction ...

Page 54: ...To correct the gap BD timing gap due to the angle variation of Scanner Mirror Laser shutter control To prevent the laser light from being emitted to the machine inside Image tilt correction control To correct the image tilt in vertical scanning direction this control is operated based on the result of color displacement correction control T 2 19 T 2 19 Main Controller DC Controller UN1 Laser ON OF...

Page 55: ...rpose This is to align the writing start position in horizontal scanning direction Execution timing Per 1 line Execution time Approx 7 5µs Control detail 1 DC Controller forcibly emits the laser diode on M laser driver PCB by setting the laser control signal of M laser to APC mode Also DC controller forcibly emits the laser diode of Bk laser driver PCB by setting the Bk laser control signal to APC...

Page 56: ...rinting Execution time 500ms Control detail 1 When DC Controller receives the print instruction it detects the reference signal Based on this signal it creates the vertical scanning synchronous signal PVREQ and sends to Main Controller 2 Main Controller is synchronized with PVREQ signal and sends VDO signal to DC Cotnroller 3 DC Controller creates the laser drive signal based on VDO signal and sen...

Page 57: ...ming Per each line before image writing Execution time Approx 2 µs Control details 1 DC Controller outputs the laser control signal to the Laser Driver IC on the Laser Driver PCB 2 APC mode is specified to the Laser Driver IC and it forcibly emits the laser diode of each color At the same time each laser driver IC monitors the laser diode LD on the photo diode PD and adjusts the output of laser di...

Page 58: ...anner motor control Purpose This is to rotate the scanner mirror by the specified speed Execution timing At power ON per printing Execution time Approx 3s at power ON approx 1s at printing Control detail 1 DC Controller forcibly rotates the motors in the two Laser Scanner Units 2 It detects the speed detection signal FG1 to 2 BD_YM BD_CBk and compares the signal with the standard signal in DC Cont...

Page 59: ...ng if the BD signal cannot be detected after the specified time E100 0300 BD error laser scanner unit 2 When the Laser Scanner Unit 2 CBk laser is started or print operation is processing if the BD signal cannot be detected after the specified time E100 B000 BD error laser scanner unit 1 2 When the Laser Scanner Unit 1 2 is started or print operation is processing if the BD cycle cannot be detecte...

Page 60: ...peed rotation control of Scanner Motor is completed 2 DC Controller calculates the correction value according to the gap of BD interval 3 Based on the foregoing correction value image writing position is corrected BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4 BD1 BD2 α α BD3 BD4 BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4 VDO VDO VDO VDO START END Scanner motor control finish Constant speed rotation detection BD interval measurement Writing start correct...

Page 61: ...utter is opened During other period the laser shutter is closed Also the Front Cover Sensor PS18 or the Right Cover Sensor PS20 works together and it stops the output signal of laser driver At the same time if the Front Cover or Right Cover is opened the Shutter is closed and the laser light path is forcibly blocked Those operations are controlled by the DC Controller Color Shutter Lever DC Contro...

Page 62: ...ion E0112 0002 Laser shutter motor error operation failure at shutter open If the Laser Shutter Sensor PS29 is still in the home position after approx 10 sec from the shutter open operation F 2 62 F 2 62 Image tilt correction control Purpose This is to prevent the gap of laser emission Execution timing At power ON per total 360 sheets printing Execution time Approx 3 sec Control detail 1 DC Contro...

Page 63: ...sitive Drum Skew Correction Motor Position relation of imaging lens and arm Position relation of imaging lens and arm Imaging Lens Photosensitive Drum Skew Correction Motor Imaging Lens Before correction After correction Scanner Mirror Skew Correction Motor Reflection Mirror Imaging Lens Arm Cam F 2 63 F 2 63 F 2 64 F 2 64 ...

Page 64: ...ife 1 Dust blocking Glass cleaning pad FL2 9476 1 150k Periodical service list Parts name Dust blocking Glass Expected life per 50K sheet Operation Clean it with the Dust blocking Glass Cleaning tool stored in the machine Dust blocking glass cleaning tool Operation at parts replacement N A Points to note at servicing N A T 2 21 T 2 21 F 2 65 F 2 65 ...

Page 65: ...m Material OPC O D of drum 30mm Cleaning Cleaning blade Process speed imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051 246mm s imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5045 215mm s imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035 5030 160mm s Drum heater Mounted with Bk drum as a standard Assigned as an option for color drums Developing assembly Developing cylinder 1pc single developing Developing method Dry 2 component jumping Toner Non magnetic negative toner ...

Page 66: ...ive potential 3 Laser exposure To create static latent image on the surface of photosensitive drum by emitting laser light image exposure laser exposure area becomes image area Developing block 4 Developing To attach negatively charged toner from the developing cylinder to the photosensitive drum by non negative 2 component jumping developing method Transfer block 5 Primary transfer To apply posit...

Page 67: ... Outer Roller Secondary transfer cleaning bias DC Approx 1 0kV Aforementioned biases are created by 3 HVT and are supplied to the loads used in the printing process Y M C Bk Y M C Bk HVT1 UN16 HVT2 UN17 HVT3 UN18 UN43 UN44 UN45 UN46 Secondary transfer outer roller Secondary transfer inner roller Primary charging roller Developing AC Developing AC DC Charging AC DC Charging AC DC Developing AC DC P...

Page 68: ...acement correction control ATVC control Toner supply Toner cap automatic opening control Toner level detection toner supply control Waste toner feeding Waste toner full level detection Waste toner case presence detection T 2 25 T 2 25 Pre exposure Pre exposure control Removing residual potential on the photosensitive drum before executing the primary charging prevents drum ghost during continuous ...

Page 69: ...y HVT1 2 PCB is applied to the primary charging roller DC controller UN1 AC DC negative HVT1 2 UN16 17 Photosensitive drum Primary charging roller Cleaning brush roller Discharge current control To apply optimal primary charging bias according to the environmental change or use condition of photosensitive drum Execution timing 1 When the power is turned ON at sleep recovery 2 At post rotation afte...

Page 70: ...value error at initial detection current monitor value is upper limit or more E061 0XF0 Current monitor value error at initial detection current monitor value is lower limit or less E061 0XF1 Change amount error of current monitor value change amount is abnormal after time elapsed x indicates the corresponding color 1 Y 2 M 3 C 4 Bk F 2 73 F 2 73 Primary charging cleaning control This machine may ...

Page 71: ...of toner on the developing cylinder Drive configuration Parts name Function M5 to M8 Developing motor To rotate the developing cylinder and the toner feeding screw TS5 to TS8 ATR sensor To detect the ratio of developer toner carrier in the developing assembly F 2 75 F 2 75 T 2 26 T 2 26 T 2 27 T 2 27 Developing bias control To create toner image on the photosensitive drum after the toner has been ...

Page 72: ...w A Toner feeding screw B Flow of toner Toner feeding screw C ATR sensor Toner discharge outlet Toner supply inlet Toner supply inlet Return screw Toner feeding screw A Toner feeding screw B Toner feeding screw C Toner discharge outlet F 2 77 F 2 77 Toner blocking bias control This control prevents scattering of toner on the developing cylinder due to deterioration of the developing assembly Devel...

Page 73: ...sensitive drum to be evenly charged potential Charging cleaning brush roller To remove residual toner on the primary charging roller Drum cleaning blade To remove residual toner on the photosensitive drum Waste toner screw To feed residual toner F 2 79 F 2 79 T 2 28 T 2 28 Drive configuration Pre exposure LED light guide Photosensitive drum Primary charging roller Waste toner screw Drum cleaning b...

Page 74: ... mode Detection description To check state of the fuse that is attached to each drum unit There is a fuse new drum Fuse is blown used drum F 2 81 F 2 81 Operation of the main unit 1 The main unit checks presence of the fuse attached to each drum the fuse detection signal is monitored 2 If there is a fuse the main unit clears the drum film thickness detection data of the applicable drum unit which ...

Page 75: ...print Control details 1 Drum lift count value is calculated by the rotation time of Photosensitive Drum and application time of primary charging AC bias 2 The count value calculated at control details step 1 is added to the drum count value stored in SRAM Detection detail Detection timing Message host machine operation Drum life warning approx 10 until the end of drum line When the drum life count...

Page 76: ...to keep a uniform drum rotation speed in order to increase accuracy of the image position color displacement Execution timing 1 The drum rotates driven by the drum motors M1 to M4 2 There is an encoder on the drum shaft of which rotation is monitored by the two sensors Y UN31 32 M UN33 34 C UN35 36 Bk UN37 38 3 This sensor counts the drum count based on a pulse and feeds back the drum rotation spe...

Page 77: ...y transfer outer roller Patch sensor Front Center Rear UN47 UN48 UN49 Primary transfer roller Bk Primary transfer roller C Primary transfer roller M Primary transfer roller Y Tension roller Primary transfer auxiliary roller ITB cleaning blade Waste toner feeding screw Drive roller steering roller ITB motor ITB displacement control motor ITB steering position sensor PS24 Primary transfer disengagem...

Page 78: ... from the ITB 3 Position of the primary transfer roller is detected by the primary transfer disengagement sensor PS22 23 MEMO At standby the color s primary transfer roller is disengaged P22 is ON the sensor flag blocks the light at the time of engagement while PS23 is ON the sensor flag blocks the light at the time of disengagement Primary transfer roller C Primary transfer disengagement sensor P...

Page 79: ... DC DC Primary transfer roller Bk Primary transfer roller C Primary transfer roller M Primary transfer roller Y F 2 89 F 2 89 Secondary transfer bias control This control transfers toner on the ITB to the paper The secondary transfer bias DC which has been generated by HVY3 UN18 is applied to the secondary transfer outer roller Bias value is determined by the measurement value of environment senso...

Page 80: ...Error Codes E075 0002 failure in ITB steering position sensor E075 0003 failure in ITB displacement control full displacement to the rear E075 0004 failure in ITB displacement sensor E075 0103 failure in ITB displacement control full displacement to the front MEMO Following table shows detection result of the ITB displacement sensor and operation of the main unit Edge state of ITB belt State of IT...

Page 81: ... image on the ITB Control description The secondary transfer bias see Note 1 which has been generated by HVT3 UN18 is applied to the secondary transfer outer roller Residual toner on the secondary transfer outer roller is attached to the ITB and then collected by the ITB cleaning unit Caution Both positive bias and negative bias are applied Because of polarized charged positive and negative residu...

Page 82: ...econdary transfer static eliminator MEMO On this machine by reducing the diameter of Secondary Transfer Inner Roller contact surface of the paper with the ITB is reduced This prevents the thin paper from sticking onto the ITB F 2 94 F 2 94 Drum cleaning Overview To clean residual toner on the photosensitive drum Residual toner on the drum is scraped by the drum cleaning blade Then rotation of the ...

Page 83: ...er ATVC Secondary transfer ATVC Secondary transfer cleaning D Max control ARCDAT control D Half control Color displacement correction control At power ON At normal condition Model A approx 20 9 Model B approx 29 5 H H environment Model A approx 46 0Model B approx 68 1 At recovery from sleep Sleep is less than 8 hours Model A approx 12 1Model B approx 17 6 Sleep is 8 hours or more Model A approx 20...

Page 84: ...tting of ITB cleaning interval T 2 34 T 2 34 Drum film thickness detection To detect use condition of the photosensitive drum Execution timing 1 When the power is turned ON 2 Every time making print Control description 1 The drum count value is calculated by the monitor signal of the primary charging AC bias 2 The count value calculated in step 1 above is added to the drum count value that has bee...

Page 85: ...esponding color on the ITB 2 DC Controller measures the patch density with the Patch Sensor center UN49 Patch sensor Center UN49 Developing cylinder Primary charging roller Primary charging DC bias Laser Power output Photosensitive drum Developing DC bias Patch image date DC controller UN1 D max control ITB HVT2 UN17 HVT1 UN16 Laser scanner unit 1 2 F 2 98 F 2 98 Start Patch pattern is created Pat...

Page 86: ... Sensor Center Patch Sensor Center Target Density Target density value Target density value Paper Paper Reader Reader Execution timing When executing calibration during execution of Auto gradation correction Full correction in User Mode Control description 1 When the specified conditions are satisfied the main controller prints 4 types of memorized test prints patch pattern 2 Set the test print on...

Page 87: ...1 Patch patterns 4 types are printed on paper Printed test patterns are scanned by the reader Y PASCAL correction table F 2 102 F 2 102 D half control This control determines optimal image gradation Execution timing 1 When replacing a drum unit or developing assembly 2 At post rotation every time the total reaches 1000 prints 3 At execution of PASCAL control Control details 1 The Main Controller 2...

Page 88: ... sensor Center UN49 Actual gradation characteristics Ideal gradation characteristics 0 100 Density data D CON Y1 Y2 Data output V CON Y9 Y10 Main controller2 DC controller UN1 Main controller2 Output of density data 100 Actual gradation characteristics Ideal gradation characteristics 0 100 Density data D CON Data output V CON 100 DC controller UN1 D half correction table is created Y M C Bk Output...

Page 89: ...otation every time the total reaches 25 prints when continuously making prints printing is interrupted for every 100 prints to execute this control F 2 105 F 2 105 Control details 1 DC Controller creates the patch pattern of each color Y M C Bk on the ITB 3 patterns per each color total 12 patterns 2 DC Controller measures the patch pattern with the Patch Sensor center UN49 and returns the result ...

Page 90: ...ha determination i e difference between SIN and INT Inclusion of result in D half correction table Patch sensor center UN49 Main controller2 Main controller2 Main controller2 DC controller UN1 Patch scanning Start DC controller UN1 F 2 107 F 2 107 Color displacement correction control This control corrects uneven exposure of the laser scanner unit or color displacement caused by uneven rotation of...

Page 91: ...uous print the job is interrupted when the total reaches 250 prints to execute this control patch sensor Control description Developer is supplied to the drum unit while the supplying amount of the developer for each color is calculated by the above mentioned start timing The DC controller determines T 2 35 T 2 35 supplying amount of toner by 3 types of data as follows Developing Assembly Toner Su...

Page 92: ... is detected 2 Optimal primary charging current value is determined based on the temperature humidity data of Environment sensor 1 3 The primary transfer DC bias is determined to apply to the primary transfer roller Secondary transfer ATVC Execution timing 1 When the power is turned ON 2 At every print job Control description 1 Monitoring current value of the secondary transfer DC bias is detected...

Page 93: ...ner cap position sensor2 PS5 PS8 Toner cap position sensor1 PS9 PS12 Execution timing When replacing a toner container Control description e g release of toner cap 1 Toner cap position sensor 1 and 2 PS5 to 12 detect the state of toner cap 2 Operation of the toner container drive motors M9 to 12 moves the cap drive link holder and the cap release holder to the right toner container side 3 The tone...

Page 94: ...oping assembly Toner supply is determined to be necessary by the result of ATR control The developing motors M5 to8 and the toner supply clutches CL2 to 5 are driven for the specified period 1 If the output result of piezo sensors TS1 to 4 keeps L despite drive of M9 to 12 make M9 to 12 driven for 2 seconds and then stopped for 2 seconds and repeat this procedure up to 20 times Toner level detecti...

Page 95: ...ner replacement mode display switch COPIER OPTION CLEANING T LW LVL No toner warning display timing changing switch Waste toner feeding assembly Overview To feed waste toner of the drum cleaning unit and the ITB cleaning unit to the waste toner case ITB cleaner unit Waste toner screw1 Waste toner feeding screw Developing assembly Drum unit Waste toner screw2 Waste toner case Waste toner ITB unit P...

Page 96: ...g Assembly toner supply count is started from full alert when a total of approx 1000 sheets is printed in case of image on A4 dot ratio of each color is 5 Developing Assembly toner supply count Please replace a waste toner case the main unit stops the operation F 2 115 F 2 115 T 2 41 T 2 41 Related Error Code E013 0001 error in lock of waste toner feeding path Detection of waste toner case To dete...

Page 97: ...s transfer efficiency on the attached area If considerable amount of resistance adjustment agent is attached on the ITB it can cause fusion in the ITB cleaning assembly To prevent this symptom toner width full width of ITB length 80mm solid black band is supplied to the ITB cleaning blade Execution timing Sheet to sheet interval after 15 sheets of transparency are printed continuously At post rota...

Page 98: ...g assembly Y FM3 8977 1 500k imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051 5045 Developing assembly M FM3 8978 1 500k imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035 5030 Developing assembly C FM3 8979 1 500k Developing assembly Bk FM3 8939 1 500k 8 Developing assembly Y FM3 8973 1 500k Developing assembly M FM3 8974 1 500k Developing assembly C FM3 8975 1 500k Developing assembly Bk FM3 8976 1 500k 9 Toner filter FC6 9817 1 100k List of ...

Page 99: ...Fixing inlet guide Fixing heater F 2 118 F 2 118 1 Saving energy Fast warm up reduces standby electric power thanks to low heat capacity 2 High speed 51ppm is enabled by introducing a new toner and the film capable of high heat transfer 3 Supported media Feeding 52g m2 paper is available due to the modification of film path and Separation Guide and image quality has been improved as well ...

Page 100: ...et temperature at printing plain paper 1 64 to 81 g m2 51 45 ppm machine 169 180 deg C 35 30 ppm machine 150 163 deg C Temperature detection By the main thermistors 2pc and the sub thermistors 2pc Protection feature Thermistors To block power supply to the fixing heater when a failure is detected Temperature fuse Rated operation temperature 228 0 6 deg C T 2 44 T 2 44 Major parts configuration Pre...

Page 101: ...mistor 1 To be in contact with the heater non feeding area Temperature control detection of abnormal temperature rise temperature detection cooling control on the edge Sub thermistor 2 To be in contact with the heater non feeding area Temperature control detection of abnormal temperature rise temperature detection cooling control on the edge TP1 Temperature fuse Noncontact type with the heater To ...

Page 102: ...ture control Down sequence control To prevent fixing failure due to rising temperature at the edge or fall in temperature This control causes reduced through put Down sequence when feeding small size paper Down sequence when switching paper size F 2 122 F 2 122 Standby temperature control Flaying start control temperature Time 15 sec PRNT STBY INTR Fixing temperature Command for flying start Flyin...

Page 103: ...increase fixing temperature to be ready for printing once the print start command is received Print temperature control To set optimal target temperature to prevent fixing failure or offset and keep the specified target temperature during printing A Setting target temperature see the table on the next page Target temperature is specified depending on the paper type environment temperature fixing s...

Page 104: ... 180 51 25 5 20 16 Thin 52 63 148 164 51 25 5 20 16 Plain 2 82 105 Bond 80 90 Except Japan 181 197 51 25 5 20 16 Plain 2 82 105 Bond 80 90 Japan 181 197 40 20 17 14 Heavy 1 106 163 Label 151 180 1 2 speed 123 mm sec 162 179 25 5 12 5 10 8 Heavy 2 164 209 Embossed 150 Postcard 4 on 1 postcard 190 Tab 166 179 20 10 8 7 5 Envelope 149 20 10 8 7 5 Coated 1 106 163 1 3 speed 82 mm sec 165 17 8 5 7 5 5 ...

Page 105: ...ches the specified temperature or higher 250 to 260 deg C during printing Operation Temperature is reduced by making wider sheet to sheet distance to control the temperature at slightly lower than the target temperature for normal print Model Paper type paper weight g m2 Target temperature deg C Print speed ppm 51 45 ppm machine Plain 1 64 81 Color 64 81 Recycled 64 81 Pre Punched Tracing paper Ja...

Page 106: ...tions If the detected temperature of sub thermistor 1 or 2 exceeds the specified temperature 250 260 deg C when switching to the paper which has longer width than the preceding paper Operation Pickup of the succeeding paper and power distribution to the heater are stopped as well F 2 125 F 2 125 Completion conditions This down sequence is completed if any of the following conditions is satisfied W...

Page 107: ...inued Direction of movement Shutter Shutter motor Shutter motor Shutter position sensor PS32 Shutter position sensor PS32 Shutter Fixing cooling fan front FM5 Fixing cooling fan rear FM6 Shutter HP sensor PS31 Shutter HP sensor PS31 M27 A4 R A4 LTR RB4EXE 8K LTR M27 There is a shutter at the air vent which moves opens in 7 levels according to the size of feeding paper This feature enables to send ...

Page 108: ...ed Error Codes E009 Error in engagement disengagement of film unit 0000 Error in engagement 0001 Error in disengagement F 2 127 F 2 127 T 2 49 T 2 49 Protection features Code Description Error Clear E001 Detection of abnormal high temperature 0000 When main thermistor 1 2 detects 255 deg C or more for 0 2 sec Clear 0001 When sub thermistor 1 2 detects 275 deg C or more for 0 2 sec Clear 0003 When ...

Page 109: ...imated life print Remarks 1 Fixing Separation Cuide FC8 4906 1 300 000 Replace the Film Unit at the same time 2 Shutter Cover XG9 0172 1 300 000 Replace the Film Unit at the same time When replacing parts Film unit pressure roller Check that the fixing nip width is within the specified range Paper to be used A4 LTR size plain paper 80 to 105 g m2 1 Set paper on the manual feed pickup tray 2 Execut...

Page 110: ...feeding paper 9 0 1 0mm Center Edge Edge 145 mm 145 mm Feeding direction If measured value is out of the specified range reinstall the replaced parts film unit or pressure roller and then measure the nip width again MEMO Fixing nip width cannot be adjusted in the field F 2 129 F 2 129 ...

Page 111: ...Specification Item Description Paper storage method Front loading method Pickup method Cassette 1 2 Separation retard method Multi purpose tray Simple retard method Paper stack capacity Cassette 1 2 550 sheets 80g m2 paper 650 sheets 64g m2 paper Multi purpose tray 100 sheets 80g m2 paper 100 sheets 64g m2 paper Paper feed reference Center reference Paper size Cassette 1 Standard universal B4 A4 B...

Page 112: ...ler 4 Duplex Inlet Roller 16 Vertical Path Roller 1 5 Duplex Feed Upper Roller 17 Registration Roller 6 Duplex Feed Lower Roller 18 Secondary Transfer Roller 7 Multi Purpose Tray Pickup Feed Roller 19 Fixing Roller 8 Multi Purpose Tray Separation Roller 20 Post Fixing Roller 9 Vertical Path Roller 2 21 Fixing Inner Delivery Roller 10 Cassette 2 Feed Roller 22 First Delivery Roller 11 Cassette 2 Se...

Page 113: ...Paper Level Sensor B PS37 Inner Delivery Sensor PS53 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A PS38 Duplex Paper Sensor PS54 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B PS39 Reverse Sensor PS55 Cassette 1 Pre Registration Sensor PS40 Duplex Inlet Sensor PS56 Cassette 2 Pre Registration Sensor PS41 First Delivery Sensor UN51 OHP Sensor PS42 Second Delivery Sensor UN53 Vertical Path Sensor PS43 Third Delivery Sensor SW6 ...

Page 114: ...y Flapper Solenoid M21 Fixing Motor SL6 Second Delivery Flapper Solenoid M22 Fixing Delivery Motor SL7 Third Delivery Flapper Solenoid M23 First Second Delivery Motor CL1 Multi Purpose Pickup Clutch F 2 132 F 2 132 Paper Path R40 R40 Option Cassette pickup Side deck pickup Third delivery Second delivery First delivery Reverse mouth Cassette 2 pickup Cassette 1 pickup Meandering is reduced Multi pu...

Page 115: ... 246mm sec Reverse sensor PS39 Delivery speed up position Duplex re pickup position Registration position Pre registration position Pre registration position Duplex paper sensor PS38 Pre registration sensor PS33 Vertical path sensor UN53 Cassette 2 pre registration sensor PS56 Inner delivery sensor PS37 F 2 134 F 2 134 ...

Page 116: ...Wait Control JAM Detection JAM Detection F 2 135 F 2 135 T 2 53 T 2 53 Cassette Pickup Assembly Overview Parts Configuration Cassette 1 paper level sensor A Cassette 1 paper level sensor B Cassette 2 paper level sensor B Cassette 2 paper level sensor A Cassette 1 pickup solenoid Cassette 2 pickup solenoid Cassette 2 paper presence sensor Cassette 1 paper presence sensor Cassette 1 Pre registration...

Page 117: ...tion Paper Level Presence Detection There are 3 sensors to detect the paper level and paper presence in the cassette Paper level is displayed on the operation panel OFF OFF OFFON ON ON If the paper is full Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A Cassette paper level sensor A Cassette paper level sensor A If the paper i...

Page 118: ...vex area of the cassette dial is switched when the guide plate is shifted and two Size Switches on a printer are switched Length and width are detected according to the ON OFF combination of switches As long as standard paper both AB type and inch type can be used However size should be found manually on the check screen for the combination of A5 Rand STMT R or the combination of B5 R and EXEC F 2...

Page 119: ...cially heavy paper 220 250 gsm etc EUR Canon Digital Office Colour Stora Enso MultiCopy Special Colour Laser Especially heavy paper 160 gsm etc EUR T 2 54 T 2 54 T 2 55 T 2 55 Multi purpose tray pickup 1 sheet feed list Be sure to set the following paper sheet by sheet to the Multi purpose Tray If fails to set the paper sheet by sheet it may cause troubles Paper type Basis weight name Glossy paper...

Page 120: ...ti purpose tray lifting solenoid Multi purpose tray Multi Purpose Tray Detachment Roller Detection Paper Presence Detection The paper presence is detected by the Multi Purpose Tray Paper Presence Sensor When the paper absence is detected if there is the same size same type paper exists in other cassette auto cassette change is executed Paper Size Detection The paper width is detected according to ...

Page 121: ... to stop the paper by the distance from the Registration Sensor to the Registration Roller with arch amount added To reduce the noise when the paper enters the Registration Roller speed is decreased by 200mm sec upon Registration Sensor ON However if the distance with the preceding paper is too far productivity cannot be satisfied Moreover the paper may be late for the image In such case only the ...

Page 122: ...uration M20 M23 M25 M24 SL6 SL7 SL5 Duplex paper sensor Duplex inlet roller Reverse roller First delivery roller Second delivery roller Third delivery roller Second third delivery Inlet roller Duplex feed upper roller Duplex feed lower roller M20 Duplex Feed Motor SL5 First Delivery Flapper Solenoid M23 First Second Delivery Motor SL6 Second Delivery Flapper Solenoid M24 Reverse Motor SL7 Third De...

Page 123: ...everse position and the number of sheet circulation by size First Second Delivery Third Delivery Small size LTR or smaller 5 3 Middle size A4R or smaller 3 3 Large size larger than A4R 3 1 Compared to the conventional model imageRUNNER C3380 feed speed at the duplex feed assembly is slowed down This is to get the precise feed to reduce the noise and the motor loads However by changing the circulat...

Page 124: ... Sensor does not execute residual jam detection Jam code Sensor XX Name Code 01 Delay jam 02 Stationary jam 03 Residual jam C5051 C5045 C5035 C5030 C5051 C5045 C5035 C5030 C5051 C5045 C5035 C5030 XX01 Cassette 1 pre registration sensor PS55 N N N N Y Y XX02 Cassette 2 pre registration sensor PS56 Y Y Y Y Y Y XX13 Vertical path sensor UN53 Y Y Y Y N N XX05 Registration sensor PS33 Y Y Y Y Y Y XX06 ...

Page 125: ...e model only Periodical service No Parts Name Execution timing Work Remarks 1 Registration roller 50k Cleaning 2 Pre registration guide 50k Cleaning 3 Transparency sensor 50k Cleaning 4 Fixing delivery guide 50k Cleaning 5 Post fixing roller 50k Cleaning 6 Fixing delivery roller 50k Cleaning 7 First delivery roller 50k Cleaning 8 Second delivery roller 50k Cleaning 9 Third delivery roller 50k Clea...

Page 126: ...have been drastically changed from the tab to icon format Main Menu Settings Registration Additional Functions mode F 2 149 F 2 149 F 2 150 F 2 150 Settings Registration screen shows menu paths on the left increasing accessibility to the paths from the current screen Remote UI Shortcuts to SMS etc are added to Remote UI Remote UI Portal and SMS F 2 151 F 2 151 F 2 152 F 2 152 ...

Page 127: ...isplayed only when a user logs in as an administrator F 2 153 F 2 153 Changes in Login application components Single Sign On hereinafter SSO conventionally packaged in Administrator s CD has been out of service and removed from Administrator s CD In addition SSO H packaged in Administrator s CD for this model is not supported in older models Support of USB Devices Mass Storage Support While the ol...

Page 128: ...g SMS depends on the setting In former SMS the language setting of initial setting registration user mode was used However when the language setting is other than English or Japanese it displays in English After changed it will be as follows Start Logged in by RLS authentication Remote UI display setup language Language priority setting of a browser Display setting of a device Display in English D...

Page 129: ...o the MEAP device so there is no need to configure them separately For the following operations in the combined environment of Windows XP and Internet Explorer6 Java2 Runtime Environment Standard Edition 1 5 or later is required User registration edit in SSO H local device Use of remote login in SSO H SMS The following system environments are required in order to enable SMS access Operating System...

Page 130: ...nd DNS server for name resolution Microsoft Windows 2000 Server SP4 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP1 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Windows 2000 2003 Domain Name System DNS access privileges Domain controller access privileges System environments for administrator and ordinary user Operating System Supported browser Java Runtime Environmen Windows 2000 Professional...

Page 131: ...ication with DNS server fixed 88 Kerberos authentication with KDC Key Distribution Center 389 Communication with directory service using LDAP default is 389 may be changed to any port on LDAP service side T 2 66 T 2 66 Local Device Authentication Management For user registration edit in Local Authentication following system requirements must be satisfied System environments for administrator and o...

Page 132: ...uch cases return to Top screen and press Log In button shown on the lower left to log in as System Manager for setup MEMO When using SSL press Settings Registration button select Management Settings License Other MEAP Settings SSL Settings and press On button This setting is applied to SSL setting on RUI Vice versa On set for SSL on RUI is also applied to the touch panel When Use SSL is set to On ...

Page 133: ...necessary for the SSL communication Set the key and the certificate by SSL with Certificate Settings that exists in System Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings on the iR device Login to SMS SMS login may be done by entering a password for authentication or by authentication via the Remote Login Service RLS login window RLS authentication Settings can be changed to allow either only one of the...

Page 134: ...tp 172 16 188 240 8000 sms MEMO The default password is MeapSmsLogin The password is case sensitive When you want to change the display original language change in the box in the right of the screen This setting is not affect by the setting of the language of the device F 2 160 F 2 160 2 If the wrong password is entered the following window is displayed The user s system administrator may have cha...

Page 135: ...password and login destination registered in the device and click Log In When using SDL as the login service enter the user information registered in the device as per local device authentication The user information is set as below for local device authentication by default Both are case sensitive User Name Administrator Password password Only the following users may us SMS via RLS In the case of...

Page 136: ...In the event of either of these cases try the following 1 If local device authentication is active try logging in with local device authentication 2 If only domain authentication is active launch in MEAP safe mode from the device service mode After launching in MEAP safe mode the Default Authentication will become active and you will be able to login to SMS with password authentication After loggi...

Page 137: ...s to Stop the user is automatically redirected to RLS authentication screen Password authentication started screen and Password authentication stopped screen F 2 165 F 2 165 F 2 166 F 2 166 Setting for login by RLS Authentication The procedures for changing the RLS authentication Start Stop settings are as follows 1 In order to make a setting for Login by RLS Authentication you need to Login by Pa...

Page 138: ...s to judge the remaining resources before installing the additional application Such resource information is shown based on the manifest header stated at the top of each application which declares the resources required in the application Therefore the information does not necessarily show the resources actually in use The following resource information is shown hard disk memory thread socket file...

Page 139: ...application name in MEAP Application Management page Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application 1 Log in to the SMS Refer to Login to SMS in this manual 2 Click Application List If the Application List is already being displayed this operation is not necessary 3 Click Start or Stop button shown for the MEAP application to be started or stopped 4 Check to see that the status of the MEAP application i...

Page 140: ...g on the 2 information below Device Specification ID MEAP Specifications Device Specification ID shows information such as the original functions of MFP including print scan and copy and one that differs by model such as maximum copy number thus each model has a different ID It is easy to determine the IDs for this reason MEAP application declares 1 or more Device Specification ID required for its...

Page 141: ...n and J2ME1 1 Support Encrypted PDF Trace and smooth PDF CTK2 0 14 Device signature PDF 15 IMI ERS API addition for IMI IPv6 Extended encryption function AES RC4 17 Acquiring images of JBIG format 18 Parsing XML documents XML parser 19 Enhancement of IMI function IMI Version1 2 series 25 API to access the HID Mass Storage class devices 26 MEAP driver preference function 27 Symbols that can be used...

Page 142: ...ding system applications is shown in an additional window Copy and paste all the information in a file to attach to AR reports as text information This function is useful to check status information of each application F 2 175 F 2 175 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application MEAP system information can be printed out with iR device for confirmation Follow the steps below when confirmi...

Page 143: ...the application is at rest Installed On It indicates the date on which the application was installed Vendor It is the name of the vendor that developed the application and is the name bundle vendor declared in a statement within the application program License Status It indicates the status of the license specifically None no license is needed Not Installed no license has been installed Installed ...

Page 144: ...r details see the User s Guide that comes with the individual applications Maximum installable application is up to 20 even if the remaining resource is adequate However the Send function consumes 1 it must be 19 in practice Authentication application is not included in this number The MEAP application which can be started simultaneously is up to 19 Authentication application is not included in th...

Page 145: ...ll not be able to update an application while it is running 5 Check the contents of the Confirm page then click OK button 6 Some applications show a screen to indicate the terms of agreement Read the terms and click OK F 2 179 F 2 179 7 Check the message Installing Please wait a moment appears beginning the installation 8 Upon installation completed click To MEAP Application Management button show...

Page 146: ...le Note that any changes added to the license file may disable installation Cares should be taken when confirming the contents of the license file Sample file License File ID Application ID Serial Number Validated Period Counter informations Adding a License File Procedure adding a license file 1 Log on to SMS 2 On MEAP Application Management click the name of the application to which you want to ...

Page 147: ... shown on the screen click License Management button F 2 183 F 2 183 4 Click Browse button and select the license file you want to install 5 Click Install button 6 Check the content of the confirmation page and click OK button F 2 184 F 2 184 F 2 185 F 2 185 ...

Page 148: ...ter restore a suspended license file as long as you are doing so on the same iR the device with the same device serial number When replacing the device due to lease up or trouble use the license for forwarding see Chapter 2 License for forwarding 1 Stop the application you want to uninstall on MEAP Application Management page F 2 186 F 2 186 2 Click the name of the application that you want to dis...

Page 149: ...download or delete a license file first disable it Once you have removed an invalidated license file you will no longer be able to download it form the MEAP device Procedure downloading removing an invalidated license file The downloaded license file can be used for reinstallation only in the same iR device with the same device serial number 1 Login to SMS 2 Application List page appears On MEAP A...

Page 150: ...o store the file by following the instructions on the screen F 2 192 F 2 192 F 2 193 F 2 193 7 To delete click Delete button 8 When the dialog to confirm deletion is shown click Yes button Without the license file an application cannot be reinstalled even to the MEAP de vice that the application had been installed last time Download and save the license file before deleting the application F 2 194...

Page 151: ...times as needed by the same license file This kind of license is called Reusable license License for forwarding Outline When the device is replaced due to lease up or trouble it is possible to continue using the current license information of MEAP application by forwarding it to a new device Service engineers are responsible for license transfer as this task requires the SMS hidden page not open t...

Page 152: ...te Transfer License File F 2 198 F 2 198 F 2 199 F 2 199 5 The window to confirm whether to create a transfer licence will be displayed Click OK 6 Icon of license file for forwarding is displayed in the box of license file downloading Click Download F 2 200 F 2 200 F 2 201 F 2 201 ...

Page 153: ...204 F 2 204 11 Since this downloaded transfer license is the file only to prove the license invalidation it cannot be used for installation to the other device as it is Send the transfer license to the service support contact of your nearest sales company to request issuance of the new license for installation in the new device MEMO When requesting issuance of license for forwarding inform the sal...

Page 154: ...that the selected application cannot be removed If the application you are uninstalling is associated with another application a mes sage will appear to indicate that the package exported by the application will no loner be available Uninstalling such an application may also disable its associated applications 1 Log in to SMS to click MEAP Application Management on the menu 2 MEAP Application Mana...

Page 155: ...the SEND function when the setting is for SSO H when sending email mail addresses need to be programmed against each user If they are not email cannot be sent Note however that when sending i Fax the mail addresses set in the device are used This device does not support SDL conventional SSO and Security Agent In addition these are not packaged in Administrator s CD T 2 74 T 2 74 Default Authentica...

Page 156: ...ing Management Plig in to enable analysis and management of the iR device usage status The protocol used is as follows Kerberos LLS RLS ILS NTLMV2 WLS Web Service Login Service User information acquisition is done by LADP so the Active Directory LDAP port needs to be made accessible If LDAP connection fails the authentication will end in error No of supported domains 200 unchanged from SSO Site ac...

Page 157: ... is now unsupported System Manager Linkage automatic ID allocation to System Managers SSO provided the automated function conventionally on Security Agent hereinafter SA to authenticate System Manager by allocating IDs set on SA to domain authentication managers users belonging to Canon Peripheral Admins group However SSO H does not support this function Access Mode in Sites With SSO H access to A...

Page 158: ...ection with Active Directory fails when acquiring site information another Active Directory will be accessed Site information once it has been acquired is cached within the device The life settings of the cache can be set so that site information in the cache is updated upon the first login after the device boots up or so that the cache is not updated once acquired Settings for access mode in site...

Page 159: ...destination domain KDC address list are computed In the event that the domain controller IP addresses of other domains are outside of the site access range and only the domain controller within the site is programmed for access an error message will be displayed to the effect that the site information is incorrect Environment confirmation Refer to the section of Checking the Operating Environment ...

Page 160: ...ement on System Management 2 A page will appear showing the various selections you can make for the login service Click SWITCH button for the login service to be used F 2 211 F 2 211 F 2 212 F 2 212 3 When login service application you have selected turns to Start after Restart restart the device F 2 213 F 2 213 ...

Page 161: ...on aims to temporarily save MEAP application memory areas in HDD of the PC at the time of HDD formatting You can back up the area of the HDD where MEAP applications reside to a PC as when you want to format the HDD MEAP devices use a license based mechanism to control applications so that formatting the HDD will necessarily delete the jar files and application data requiring you to not only reinst...

Page 162: ...ice user information it is recommended to export the user information just in case For local device user information backup go to User Management page of SSO H site and export the data The SSO H login page opens with the URL http device IP address 8000 sso T 2 76 T 2 76 If a hard disk of a system that uses SSO H is formatted without changing the login service to the default authentication the erro...

Page 163: ...stalling files When HDD is successfully formatted install a set of System files 2 Restoring backup file Click Upload Data button and select the data backed up in the previous step Meapback bin to click Start Restoring Data Note that the data backed up in a different version cannot be restored 3 Transferring Data When the data is successfully transferred click the OK button shown on the screen To c...

Page 164: ...rs of Canon HDD replacement procedure 1 Copy a set of obtained special license files to a laptop for service operation Register a set of System files Language files Remote UI files HDD format files MeapContents files of a target product to SST System Support Tool Make sure the compatibility of the each file version 2 Prepare the required service parts of the HDD unit and replace the HDD unit on us...

Page 165: ...ondition so that you can take necessary measures for example you can stop application that may cause the trouble If default authentication has been selected the mode of authentication remains valid otherwise the message The login service must be set again with SMS ap pears Change the login service as necessary Starting in Safe Mode 1 Startup level 2 of SERVICE MODE The start procedure of SERVICE M...

Page 166: ...u want to end safe mode repeat the steps but change 1 to 0 in step 4 and restart the device MEMO If accessed to SMS in MEAP SAFE mode the device started mode is shown on the title bar of the browser When normally started Service Management Service Device Name Product Name When starting in MEAP SAFE mode Service Management Service Device Name Product Name Safe Mode c ...

Page 167: ...n tication application port 8080 is reserved for redirecting from PS print server unit to device HTTPS server Setting value is 0 through 65535 the value at factory shipment after clearing RAM 8443 MEMO As for port on HTTPS server it only applies to the device that supports SSL function Port setup procedure of HTTP Server 1 Startup level 2 of SERVICE MODE The start procedure of SERVICE MODE level2 ...

Page 168: ...the same time on control panel 3 Press Settings Registration button 4 SERVICE MODE screen is displayed 5 Press Settings Registration button 6 Press 2 button 2 Press COPIER Option NETWORK buttons 3 Press or button until MEAP SSL is shown on the screen Press MEAP SSL button F 2 228 F 2 229 4 Press the port number to specify on the control panel the numerical value input in the field is displayed and...

Page 169: ...applications there is setting function MEAP driver preference registration to give priority to the MEAP driver If you register the ID of the USB device by using this function the USB device can use the MEAP driver despite the Additional Function settings Using this function requires the conditions below Supported MEAP SpecVer 26 Describe the idVendeor VID and idProdutc PID of USB device in the man...

Page 170: ...or Input from the USB keyboard can be accepted at the same time as input from the software keyboard or numeric keys Since the device supports Plug and Play the USB keyboard can be disconnected connected freely However do not disconnect and connect during in deep sleep when in sleep with setting low at the power consumption in sleep It is out of an operation guarantee to disconnect and connect the ...

Page 171: ...dProduct registered in this device by means of declaration in Manifest file of MEAP applications output the USB Device repot report print Steps to output the USB Device report print 1 Start SERVICE MODE in Level 1 F 2 234 F 2 235 2 Press COPIER Function MISC P button 3 Press or button for several times until USBH PRT is shown Press USBH PRT button 4 When pressing OK button ACTIVE blinks on the sta...

Page 172: ...ernal hierarchical structure which a USB device is connected is shown The number of a connected bus the hierarchical structure and connection speed can be indicated D Device Information of USB devices is shown P Product Product information of USB devices is shown Vendor ID and Product ID can be recognized here S String The character string embedded in a USB device is shown A manufacture name and a...

Page 173: ...fines an object model of peripheral deices A client can control a device by creating or modifying objects in the device CPCA Java CL Class Library CPCA Java Class Library A Java class library which is used to control a device Default Authentication Department ID Management The login service used when the department ID control is used but other authentication controls are not used When the Departme...

Page 174: ...grams on a peripheral device Uses the Java platform J2ME Java 2 platform Micro Edition to run Java application for MEAP MEAP Contents iRequired to install an MEAP application to a MEAP device Terms Acronyms Definitions and Explanations MEAP Specifications MEAP Spec Version MEAP Spec Version the term used for the SDK The version number that shows the APIs of the MEAP platform other than CPCA such a...

Page 175: ...rogram is running At least one thread is generated upon a program generated URL Uniform Resource Locator The method to denote Web page locations on Internet and the like For instance a URL on the Web is denoted as http www w3 org default html http at the beginning means that an address following this is in a web page on the Internet USB Abbreviation of Universal Serial Bus This is the interface st...

Page 176: ...tton 5 Press DSPLY SW button 6 Press or arrow button 7 Press ANIM SW button 8 Press either 0 display warning screen or 1 hide warning screen on control panel the numerical value input in the field is displayed and press OK button 9 Check to see that it is reflected in setting field and restart the device Setting of Screen Transition from MEAP Screen to the Standard Screen level2 In the case that t...

Page 177: ...ranet Firewall Communicationg using HTTPS SOAP DNS server The e Maintenance imageWARE Remote system using E RDS F 2 241 F 2 241 Features and benefits E RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front end processing of e Maintenance imageWARE Remote system without attaching any extra hardware equipment The following functions are added Service Call Button If a user touches Service...

Page 178: ...ng Proxy server address Information item 4 Is proxy server authentication required If proxy server authentication is required find out the following User name and password required for proxy authentication Port No for proxy server 3 Network settings Based on the results of the information obtained in 2 Advance preparations make the iR device network related settings in accordance with the followin...

Page 179: ...d above Set Use Proxy to On Enter the server address and port Number k If proxy server authentication is required Touch Authentication Settings l Set the following items based on the information obtained under 2 Advance preparations Information item 4 described above Use Proxy Authentication to On User name Password F 2 244 F 2 244 m Touch OK n Touch OK to quit the Settings Registration o Turn the...

Page 180: ...value is 0 not in use SERVICE BROWSER settings Item Script format Description BRWS ACT Activate Service Browsing Browsing info is sent to UGW when OFF BRWS ACT 0 is changed to ACTIVE Setting result is displayed as OK NG BRWS STS COPIER DISPLAY USER 2 bytes Activate Service Browsing Browsing info is sent to UGW when OFF BRWS ACT 0 is changed to ACTIVE Setting result is displayed as OK NG T 2 83 T 2...

Page 181: ...unless there are specific instructions to do so Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW c Select COM TEST and then touch OK This initiates the communication test between the device and the UGW If the communication is successful OK is displayed If NG failed appears refer to the troubleshooting guide and repeat until OK is displayed F 2 250 F 2 250 F 2 251 F 2 251 ...

Page 182: ...e through which it passes to UGW will be tried and the following messages will be displayed One Request is touched the notice to UGW will be tried and below guidance will be displayed Status User Message Request starts The call will be sent wait a while Done The call has been sent To cancel calling touch the Cancel request Failure The calling is failed In processing No message After the service co...

Page 183: ...RWS STS BRWS STS is changed to 1 from 0 automatically F 2 253 F 2 253 F 2 254 F 2 254 Case Description Transferred Info Error retry When Service Browse is Activated In case of operation from Off only 1 Service Browser is enables from Servicemode menu 2 Browsing data is sent to UGW 3 If UGW replies Service Browser is set 1 Active Rebooting is required Service Browser Register WEB Browser option On ...

Page 184: ...after eliminating the oldest data The retry data will be sent at interval of 5 n minutes n retries 5 10 15minutes up to 30 min 2 As to postJamLog postServiceCallLog and postAlarmLog these retries depend on the CPCA data which saved internally Therefore if the data remains these retries will be done Q6 How many log data can be stored A6 Up to 30 log data can be accumulated The data size of error in...

Page 185: ...k connections Is the status indicator LED for the HUB port to which the main unit is connected ON YES Proceed to Step 2 NO Check that the network cable is properly connected 2 Confirm loop back address a Settings Registration Registration System administration settings Network settings TCP IP settings IPv4 settings PING command Input 127 0 0 1 and touch the Start button Is the response from the ho...

Page 186: ...rom the host displayed YES Proceed to Troubleshooting using communication log NO There is a possibility that the DNS server address is wrong Reconfirm the address with the user s system administrator Remedy2 1 Troubleshooting using communication log Enter Servicemode Function INSTALL COM LOG and the following communication log F 2 257 F 2 257 will be displayed In the log text strings that start wi...

Page 187: ...tain problem occurred in networking Remedy Check and take actions mentioned below 1 Check networking conditions and connections 2 Turn on the power supply of a device and perform a communication test servicemode F 2 259 F 2 259 COPIER Function INSTALL E RDS COM TEST about 60 seconds later No 4 Unknown error is displayed though a communication test has done successfully Causes A certain problem was...

Page 188: ...cate other than that initially registered in the user s operating environment is being used but has not been registered with the device Install the latest device system software Upgrade Code Error strings Cause Remedy 8xxx 2029 Server certificate verify error The server certificate verification error occurred URL check error Check that Service mode Function Install RGW ADR can be https a01 ugwdevi...

Page 189: ...E RDS RGW ADDRESS can be https a01 ugwdevice net ugw agentif010 If not enter the correct URL strings in URL description field 8xxx 200B Server address resolution error Server address name resolution has failed Check that the value of Service mode Function Install RGW ADR can be https a01 ugwdevice net ugw agentif010 0xxx 0003 Communication test is not performed Communication test has not completed...

Page 190: ...fter replacing the main controller board all settings must be reprogrammed 2 The following settings in service mode must not be change unless there are specific instructions to do so Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW Service mode COPIER Function INSTALL RGW PORT Default 443 Service mode COPIER Function INSTALL RGW ADR Default https a01 ugwdevice net ugw agentif010 3 ...

Page 191: ...3 3 Periodical Service Consumable Parts and Cleaning Parts Cleaning Parts ...

Page 192: ...aning blade FM3 6018 1 DRBL 1 T CLN BD 23 Fixing System Film unit 100V FM3 5949 1 DRBL 1 FX UNIT For 100V 24 Film unit 120V FM3 5950 1 DRBL 1 FX UNIT For 120V 25 Film unit 230V FM3 5951 1 DRBL 1 FX UNIT For 230V 26 Pressure roller FC8 4906 1 DRBL 1 FX LW RL 27 Fixing bearing XG9 0172 2 PRDC 1 FX LW BR 28 Shutter cover FC8 5043 1 Δ Cleaning when replace Film Unit 29 Fixing separation guide FC8 5046...

Page 193: ...3 3 3 3 3 3 Recycle toner bottle Dust blocking glass cleaning pad Toner filter F 3 1 F 3 1 ...

Page 194: ...y transfer roller Secondary transfer inner roller Secondary transfer outer roller ITB ITB cleaning blade Transfer Separation guide unit Developing unit Y Developing unit M Developing unit C Developing unit Bk F 3 2 F 3 2 ...

Page 195: ...3 3 3 5 3 5 Roller pressure Fixing bearing Fixing bearing Film unit 100V 120V 230V F 3 3 F 3 3 ...

Page 196: ... idler gear Pickup idler gear Cassette separation 2 roller Cassette feeding 2 roller Cassette feeding 1 roller Cassette separation 1 roller Multi Purpose Tray Separation Roller Multi Purpose Tray Feed Roller F 3 4 F 3 4 ...

Page 197: ...Delivery Inlet Roller 4 Fixing Inner Delivery Roller 5 Duplex Feed Upper Roller 6 Fixing Delivery Guide Assembly 7 Duplex Feed Lower Roller 8 Registration Roller 9 Pre registration Guide Assembly 10 Transparency Sensor 11 Dust blocking Glass 12 Secondary Transfar Guide Assembly 13 Feed Contact Point Guide Assembly 14 Post Fixing Roller 15 First Delivery Roller ...

Page 198: ...4 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning Main Controller Laser Exposure System Image Formation System Fixing System Pickup Feed System Option List of Parts ...

Page 199: ... 1 FC8 7819 6 Control panel side cover 2 FC8 7820 7 Front right cover FC8 4126 8 Front upper cover FC8 4146 9 Toner replacement cover FC8 4111 10 Front cover FC8 4123 11 Left grip cover FC8 4143 12 Left duct cover FC8 4140 13 Left lower cover FC8 4138 14 Left upper cover FC8 4139 15 Inner bottom cover FC8 4149 16 Reader left cover FC8 6098 17 Reader left retaining cover FC8 6117 18 DF base left co...

Page 200: ...r cover FC8 4875 37 casset right upper sub cover 2 38 Right lower sub cover 1 FC8 4922 39 Casset grip 40 casset right upper cover 2 FC8 4845 41 casset right upper sub cover 1 FC8 4861 42 casset right upper sub cover 3 43 Right front cover 3 FC8 4134 44 Stack bypass tray sub cover FC8 5105 45 Right front cover 2 FC8 4921 46 Stack bypass tray FC8 5100 47 Right front cover 1 FC8 4153 48 Grip FC8 4835...

Page 201: ...er right cover Output frame No Name Service Parts No Refarence 52 Inner output cover FC8 4936 53 Output frame FL3 1127 54 Output tray guide FL2 9483 55 Output tray FC8 4144 56 Output stopper FC8 4766 57 Inner rear cover 3 FC8 4917 58 Inner rear cover 2 FC8 4145 59 Inner rear cover 1 FC8 4915 60 Inner right cover F 4 3 F 4 3 T 4 3 T 4 3 ...

Page 202: ...t Layout Primary transfer roller Secondary transfer inner roller Secondary transfer outer roller ITB ITB cleaning blade Transfer Separation guide unit Developing unit Y Developing unit M Developing unit C Developing unit Bk F 4 4 F 4 4 ...

Page 203: ...r container M Toner container C Toner container Bk Developing Assembly Y Drum Unit C Developing Assembly C Drum Unit M Developing Assembly M Drum Unit Bk Developing Assembly Bk Process Unit ITB Unit ITB Cleaning Unit Laser Scanner Unit F 4 5 F 4 5 ...

Page 204: ... idler gear Pickup idler gear Cassette separation 2 roller Cassette feeding 2 roller Cassette feeding 1 roller Cassette separation 1 roller Multi Purpose Tray Separation Roller Multi Purpose Tray Feed Roller F 4 6 F 4 6 ...

Page 205: ...ssembly C C5051 C5045 FM3 8979 17 Developing Assembly Bk C5051 C5045 FM3 8939 18 Developing Assembly Y C5035 C5030 FM3 8973 19 Developing Assembly M C5035 C5030 FM3 8974 20 Developing Assembly C C5035 C5030 FM3 8975 21 Developing Assembly Bk C5035 C5030 FM3 8976 22 Process Unit NPN 23 Laser Scanner Unit C5051 C5045 FM3 5420 24 Laser Scanner Unit C5035 C5030 FM3 5425 25 Second and Third Delivery Un...

Page 206: ...Name Main Unit Service Parts No Refarence SL2 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid Cassette Pickup Unit FK2 0408 SL3 Cassette 2 pickup solenoid Cassette Pickup Unit FK2 0408 SL5 First delivery flapper solenoid Second and Third Delivery Unit FH6 5088 SL6 Second delivery flapper solenoid Second and Third Delivery Unit FH6 5088 SL7 Third delivery flapper solenoid Second and Third Delivery Unit FH6 5088 F 4 8 F...

Page 207: ... SL4 Registration shutter solenoid SL1 No Name Main Unit Service parts No Refarence CL1 Multi purpose pickup clutch Device Parts rear FH6 5076 SL1 Registration shutter solenoid Device Parts front FH7 5940 SL4 Multi purpose tray lifting solenoid Device Parts rear FK2 7310 F 4 9 F 4 9 ...

Page 208: ...L4 Toner supply clutch Bk CL5 No Name Main Unit Service parts No Refarence CL2 Toner supply clutch Y Main Drive Unit FK2 7285 CL3 Toner supply clutch M Main Drive Unit FK2 7285 CL4 Toner supply clutch C Main Drive Unit FK2 7285 CL5 Toner supply clutch Bk Main Drive Unit FK2 7285 T 4 4 T 4 4 ...

Page 209: ...tor M20 Registration motor M19 Multi purpose motor M18 Cassette 1 pickup motor M16 Cassette 2 pickup motor M17 Toner container motor Y M9 Toner container motor M M10 Toner container motor C M11 Toner container motor Bk M12 F 4 10 F 4 10 ...

Page 210: ...07 M11 Toner container motor C Device parts rear FK2 7307 M12 Toner container motor Bk Device parts rear FK2 7307 M16 Cassette 1 pickup motor cassette FK2 7326 M17 Cassette 2 pickup motor cassette FK2 7326 M18 Multi purpose motor Device parts rear FK2 7304 M19 Registration motor Device parts rear FK2 7327 M20 Duplex feed motor Device parts rear FK2 7326 T 4 5 T 4 5 ...

Page 211: ...ser shutter motor M28 No Name Main Unit Service parts No Refarence M21 Fixing motor Device parts center FK2 7301 M22 Fixing delivery motor Device parts center FK2 7304 M27 Shutter motor Device parts center FK2 2069 M28 Laser shutter motor Device parts center FK2 2069 T 4 6 T 4 6 ...

Page 212: ...r M M32 Scanner motor YM M29 Scanner motor CBk M30 Image skew correction motor Y M31 Image skew correction motor Bk M34 Image skew correction motor C M33 Recycle toner stirring motor M26 Primary transfer separation motor M15 ITB displacement control motor M14 ITB motor M13 Third delivery motor M25 ...

Page 213: ... Third Delivery Unit FK2 7304 M25 Third delivery motor Second and Third Delivery Unit FK2 7304 M26 Recycle toner stirring motor Process Unit FK2 7328 M29 Scanner motor YM Laser Scanner Unit FK2 8602 M30 Scanner motor CBk Laser Scanner Unit FK2 8602 M31 Image skew correction motor Y Laser Scanner Unit RH7 1501 M32 Image skew correction motor M Laser Scanner Unit RH7 1501 M33 Image skew correction m...

Page 214: ...4 4 4 17 4 17 Drum motor Bk M4 Drum motor C M3 Drum motor M M2 Drum motor Y M1 Developing motor Bk M8 Developing motor C M7 Developing motor M M6 Developing motor Y M5 F 4 11 F 4 11 ...

Page 215: ...or M Main Drive Unit FK2 7298 M3 Drum motor C Main Drive Unit FK2 7298 M4 Drum motor Bk Main Drive Unit FK2 7298 M5 Developing motor Y Main Drive Unit FK2 7303 M6 Developing motor M Main Drive Unit FK2 7303 M7 Developing motor C Main Drive Unit FK2 7303 M8 Developing motor Bk Main Drive Unit FK2 7303 T 4 8 T 4 8 ...

Page 216: ...4 4 4 19 4 19 Fan Fixing heat exhaust fan 1 FM1 Fixing heat exhaust fan 2 FM2 Delivery fan 2 FM9 F 4 12 F 4 12 ...

Page 217: ...4 4 4 20 4 20 Process cartridge fan front FM10 Process cartridge fan rear FM4 Fixing cooling fan front FM5 Secondary transfer exhaust fan FM8 Fixing cooling fan rear FM6 Delivery fan 1 FM7 F 4 13 F 4 13 ...

Page 218: ...4 4 4 21 4 21 Power supply cooling fan FM3 Controller fan 3 FM13 HDD cooling fan FM14 Controller fan 1 FM11 Controller fan 2 FM12 F 4 14 F 4 14 ...

Page 219: ...ooling fan front Device parts center FK2 3679 FM6 Fixing cooling fan rear Device parts center FK2 3679 FM7 Delivery fan 1 Device parts center FK2 7362 FM8 Secondary transfer exhaust fan Device parts center FK2 7290 FM9 Delivery fan 2 Device parts front FK2 7291 FM10 Process cartridge fan front Device parts center FK2 3679 FM11 Controller fan 1 Electric FK2 8372 FM12 Controller fan 2 Electric FK2 8...

Page 220: ...S25 ITB steering sensor PS24 Primary transfer detachment sensor 1 PS22 Primary transfer detachment sensor 2 PS23 Second delivery tray full sensor PS45 Second delivery sensor PS42 Duplex inlet sensor PS40 Third delivery sensor PS43 Reverse sensor PS39 ITB displacement sensor 3 PS27 ITB displacement sensor 2 PS26 ITB displacement sensor 4 PS28 F 4 15 F 4 15 ...

Page 221: ...ent sensor 4 ITB Unit WG8 5848 PS30 Fixing pressure sensor Fixing Assembly WG8 5848 PS31 Shutter HP sensor Fixing Assembly WG8 5848 PS32 Shutter position sensor Fixing Assembly WG8 5848 PS37 Inner delivery sensor Fixing Assembly WG8 5848 PS39 Reverse sensor Second and Third Delivery Unit WG8 5848 PS40 Duplex inlet sensor Second and Third Delivery Unit WG8 5848 PS42 Second delivery sensor Second an...

Page 222: ...use Y UN56 Y drum rotation sensor 1 UN31 Y drum rotation sensor 2 UN32 M drum rotation sensor 1 UN33 M drum rotation sensor 2 UN34 C drum rotation sensor 1 UN35 C drum rotation sensor 2 UN36 Bk drum rotation sensor 1 UN37 Bk drum rotation sensor 2 UN38 New old detection fuse M UN57 New old detection fuse C UN58 New old detection fuse Bk UN59 ...

Page 223: ...r cam HP sensor C Hopper Unit WG8 5848 16 PS12 Toner cap position sensor Bk Hopper Unit WG8 5848 No Name Main Unit Service parts No Refarence TS5 ATR sensor Y Developing Assembly FK2 7872 TS6 ATR sensor M Developing Assembly FK2 7872 TS7 ATR sensor C Developing Assembly FK2 7872 TS8 ATR sensor Bk Developing Assembly FK2 7872 UN31 Y drum rotation sensor 1 Main Drive Unit FM3 7944 UN32 Y drum rotati...

Page 224: ...18 Laser shutter sensor PS29 Environment sensor 1 UN22 Registration sensor PS33 Patch sensor rear UN48 Patch sensor center UN49 Patch sensor front UN47 First delivery tray full sensor PS44 Right door sensor PS20 First delivery sensor PS41 Second third delivery door sensor PS21 Fixing inlet sensor PS34 Fixing arch sensor 1 PS35 Fixing arch sensor 2 PS36 Vertical path sensor UN53 Environment sensor ...

Page 225: ...r sensor Device Parts center WG8 5848 PS29 Laser shutter sensor Device Parts center WG8 5848 PS33 Registration sensor Device Parts center WG8 5848 PS35 Fixing arch sensor 1 2 side Unit WG8 5848 PS36 Fixing arch sensor 2 2 side Unit WG8 5848 PS41 First delivery sensor Device Parts center WG8 5848 PS44 First delivery tray full sensor Device Parts center WG8 5848 UN22 Environment sensor 1 Device Part...

Page 226: ...vel sensor A PS53 Cassette 2 paper sensor PS50 Cassette 1 paper sensor PS49 Cassette 1 pre registration sensor PS55 Cassette 2 pre registration sensor PS56 Cassette 2 paper level sensor B PS54 Multi purpose paper sensor PS47 Multi purpose size sensor UN52 Duplex paper sensor PS38 Right lower door sensor PS19 ...

Page 227: ...sette Pickup Unit WG8 5848 PS51 Cassette 1 paper level sensor A Cassette Pickup Unit WG8 5848 PS52 Cassette 1 paper level sensor B Cassette Pickup Unit WG8 5848 PS53 Cassette 2 paper level sensor A Cassette Pickup Unit WG8 5848 PS54 Cassette 2 paper level sensor B Cassette Pickup Unit WG8 5848 PS55 Cassette 1 pre registration sensor Cassette Pickup Unit WG8 5848 PS56 Cassette 2 pre registration se...

Page 228: ...4 4 4 31 4 31 Heater Other Main thermistor 2 TH1 Main thermistor 1 TH1 Sub thermistor 1 TH1 Sub thermistor 2 TH1 Temperature fuse TP1 Fixing heater H1 Drum heater Bk H2 F 4 18 F 4 18 ...

Page 229: ...4 4 4 32 4 32 Speaker SP1 Leakage breaker ELCB1 F 4 19 F 4 19 ...

Page 230: ...mbly FK2 7292 H2 Drum heater Bk Process Unit FK2 7295 SP1 Speaker Electric FK2 0428 TH1 Main thermistor 2 Fixing Assembly FK2 7312 TH1 Main thermistor 1 Fixing Assembly FK2 7312 TH1 Sub thermistor 1 Fixing Assembly FK2 7312 TH1 Sub thermistor 2 Fixing Assembly FK2 7312 TP1 Temperature fuse Fixing Assembly FK2 7314 T 4 15 T 4 15 ...

Page 231: ...4 Switch DC interlock switch 1 SW3 Cassette 1 size switch B SW7 Cassette 2 size switch B SW9 Cassette 1 size switch A SW6 Cassette 2 size switch A SW8 DC interlock switch 2 SW4 AC interlock switch SW5 F 4 20 F 4 20 ...

Page 232: ...4 4 4 35 4 35 Main power supply switch SW1 Environment switch SW2 F 4 21 F 4 21 ...

Page 233: ... SW3 DC interlock switch 1 Device Parts front FK2 0506 SW4 DC interlock switch 2 Device Parts front FK2 0506 SW5 AC interlock switch Device Parts rear FK2 3076 SW6 Cassette 1 size switch A Cassette WC2 5680 SW7 Cassette 1 size switch B Cassette WC2 5680 SW8 Cassette 2 size switch A Cassette WC2 5680 SW9 Cassette 2 size switch B Cassette WC2 5680 ...

Page 234: ...CB M UN12 Laser driver PCB C UN15 Laser driver PCB Bk UN14 Toner sensor relay PCB Y UN39 Toner sensor relay PCB M UN40 Toner sensor relay PCB C UN41 Toner sensor relay PCB Bk UN42 Hub PCB Ten key PCB Inverter PCB CPU PCB Volume PCB Sub key PCB F 4 22 F 4 22 ...

Page 235: ...Laser Scanner Unit FM3 5420 C5035 C5030 UN12 Laser driver PCB M Laser Scanner Unit FM3 5425 UN13 Laser driver PCB Y Laser Scanner Unit FM3 5425 UN14 Laser driver PCB Bk Laser Scanner Unit FM3 5425 UN15 Laser driver PCB C Laser Scanner Unit FM3 5425 UN39 Toner sensor relay PCB Y Hopper Unit FM3 7948 UN40 Toner sensor relay PCB M Hopper Unit FM3 7948 UN41 Toner sensor relay PCB C Hopper Unit FM3 794...

Page 236: ...e LED PCB rear UN24 Y pre exposure LED PCB front UN23 M pre exposure LED PCB front UN25 C pre exposure LED PCB front UN27 Drum unit new old detection PCB UN19 Process unit relay PCB UN20 Recycle toner sensor PCB UN21 Developing sub bias PCB M UN44 Developing sub bias PCB C UN45 Developing sub bias PCB Bk UN46 Bk pre exposure LED PCB front UN29 F 4 23 F 4 23 ...

Page 237: ...front Process Unit FM3 7945 UN26 M pre exposure LED PCB rear Process Unit FM3 7945 UN27 C pre exposure LED PCB front Process Unit FM3 7945 UN28 C pre exposure LED PCB rear Process Unit FM3 7945 UN29 Bk pre exposure LED PCB front Process Unit FM3 7945 UN30 Bk pre exposure LED PCB rear Process Unit FM3 7945 UN43 Developing sub bias PCB Y Developing Assembly FM3 7951 UN44 Developing sub bias PCB M De...

Page 238: ... controller PCB UN1 HVT 3 PCB UN18 Pickup feed driver PCB UN2 Cassette feed driver PCB UN3 AC driver PCB UN6 AC sub driver PCB UN7 12V power supply PCB UN11 24V power supply PCB 1 UN8 HVT 1 PCB UN16 Drum driver PCB UN4 Relay PCB UN5 24V power supply PCB 2 UN10 All night power PCB UN9 F 4 24 ...

Page 239: ...B Electric FM3 7934 UN5 Relay PCB Electric FM3 7935 UN6 AC driver PCB Electric FM3 7936 UN7 AC sub driver PCB Electric FM3 7950 UN8 24V power supply PCB 1 Electric FM3 7955 UN9 All night power PCB Electric FK2 6324 UN10 24V power supply PCB 2 Electric FK2 6448 UN11 12V power supply PCB Electric FK2 6319 UN16 HVT 1 PCB Electric FK2 7348 UN17 HVT 2 PCB Electric FK2 7349 UN18 HVT 3 PCB Electric FK2 7...

Page 240: ...4 4 4 43 4 43 Conector 25 25 25 25 28 27 30 29 13 24 23 1 10 22 7 31 6 5 4 3 2 17 26 12 16 19 18 21 11 20 14 9 8 F 4 25 ...

Page 241: ...654 UN16 HVT 1 PCB 7 J110 UN1 DC controller PCB J5044 21 J653 UN16 HVT 1 PCB 8 J111 UN1 DC controller PCB 22 J656 UN17 HVT 2 PCB 8 J111 UN1 DC controller PCB 23 J655 UN17 HVT 2 PCB 9 J112 UN1 DC controller PCB J5026 J5036 24 J5061 SW1 Main power supply switch 9 J112 UN1 DC controller PCB J5026 J5036 J5075 J5012 25 J42 TH1 Main thermistor 1 9 J112 UN1 DC controller PCB J5026 J5036 J5075 J5012 25 J4...

Page 242: ...4 4 4 45 4 45 24 32 30 35 34 33 31 1 2 11 8 7 12 6 5 4 9 25 18 17 10 3 15 16 13 14 19 21 20 F 4 26 ...

Page 243: ...J5028 J5068 21 J6085 PS35 Fixing arch sensor 1 6 J124 UN1 DC controller PCB J5045 24 J6084 M21 Fixing motor 7 J125 UN1 DC controller PCB 25 J203 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB 8 J126 UN1 DC controller PCB J5071 J815 Buffer Pass Unit G1 8 J126 UN1 DC controller PCB J5071 J816 Inner Finisher A1 9 J127 UN1 DC controller PCB J5037 J809 Booklet Finisher C1 Staple Finisher C1 9 J127 UN1 DC controller PCB J8...

Page 244: ...4 4 4 47 4 47 26 24 19 20 6 9 17 1 4 5 3 2 16 12 10 15 14 13 18 8 28 29 7 21 27 31 22 23 11 25 F 4 27 ...

Page 245: ...iver PCB J5048 J5046 16 J6108 UN49 Patch sensor center 3 J207 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB J5048 J5046 17 J6107 UN48 Patch sensor rear 3 J207 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB J5048 J5046 18 J6106 UN47 Patch sensor front 4 J210 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB J5032 J5108 19 J6076 PS40 Duplex inlet sensor 4 J210 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB J5032 20 J6075 PS43 Third delivery sensor 4 J210 UN2 Pickup feed driver PC...

Page 246: ...4 4 4 49 4 49 14 13 12 11 20 21 22 23 25 6 4 1 3 2 5 27 7 8 9 18 19 10 33 31 26 17 15 30 34 24 29 16 32 F 4 28 ...

Page 247: ... M17 Cassette 2 pickup motor 4 J216 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB J5036 J5075 J5012 20 J6103 PS31 Shutter HP sensor 4 J216 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB J5036 J5075 J5012 21 J6102 PS32 Shutter position sensor 4 J216 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB J5036 J5075 J5012 J5060 22 J6104 PS30 Fixing pressure sensor 4 J216 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB J5038 J5075 J5012 J5060 23 J6101 PS37 Inner delivery sensor 5 J217 U...

Page 248: ...4 4 4 51 4 51 19 3 1 2 7 5 4 10 11 8 12 9 6 15 13 16 17 14 25 24 23 22 21 20 F 4 29 ...

Page 249: ...133 SL2 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid 2 J235 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB J5040 J5064 14 J6132 PS55 Cassette 1 pre registration sensor 2 J235 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB J5040 J5064 15 J6131 PS52 Cassette 1 paper level sensor B 2 J235 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB J5040 J5064 16 J6130 PS51 Cassette 1 paper level sensor A 2 J235 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB J5040 J5064 17 J6129 PS49 Cassette 1 paper s...

Page 250: ...4 4 4 53 4 53 42 45 44 43 41 40 37 33 30 17 18 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 8 9 1 3 6 5 4 2 7 19 20 31 32 29 10 11 12 13 34 16 35 36 39 14 15 38 F 4 30 ...

Page 251: ... sensor 2 4 J306 UN4 Drum driver PCB 27 J6018 UN37 Bk drum rotation sensor 1 4 J306 UN4 Drum driver PCB 28 J6017 UN38 Bk drum rotation sensor 2 5 J307 UN4 Drum driver PCB 29 J6010 M1 Drum motor Y 6 J308 UN4 Drum driver PCB 30 J6009 M4 Drum motor Bk 6 J308 UN4 Drum driver PCB 31 J6014 M3 Drum motor C 6 J308 UN4 Drum driver PCB 32 J6016 M2 Drum motor M 7 J309 UN4 Drum driver PCB J5079 J5029 J5030 33...

Page 252: ...4 4 4 55 4 55 31 23 24 2 11 16 1 3 34 4 9 30 22 19 21 18 20 15 32 14 8 10 7 12 5 6 F 4 31 ...

Page 253: ...5 Relay PCB 20 J301 UN4 Drum driver PCB 7 J424 UN5 Relay PCB 21 J302 UN4 Drum driver PCB 8 J425 UN5 Relay PCB J5043 22 J650 UN16 HVT 1 PCB 8 J425 UN5 Relay PCB 23 J651 UN17 HVT 2 PCB 8 J425 UN5 Relay PCB 24 J652 UN18 HVT 3 PCB 9 J427 UN5 Relay PCB J5081 J802 USB Device Port B1 10 J428 UN5 Relay PCB J5080 J804 Inner Finisher A1 10 J428 UN5 Relay PCB J805 Cassette feeding Unit AD1 10 J428 UN5 Relay ...

Page 254: ...4 4 4 57 4 57 26 25 21 22 32 15 19 29 18 30 31 20 3 4 8 12 13 14 10 1 2 5 6 9 7 32 11 27 F 4 32 ...

Page 255: ...12 J5007 TP1 Temperature fuse 6 J1006 UN6 AC driver PCB J5006 J5010 SW1 Main power supply switch 7 J1007 UN6 AC driver PCB 32 J5005 H4 Cassette heater 32 J1008 UN6 AC driver PCB Cassette Feeding Unit AD1 8 J1009 UN6 AC driver PCB SW2 Environment switch 9 J1010 UN6 AC driver PCB J5102 Reader controll PCB 10 J1011 UN6 AC driver PCB J5038 25 J5088 H3 Drum heater YMC 10 J1011 UN6 AC driver PCB 26 J503...

Page 256: ...4 4 4 59 4 59 13 8 2 3 1 7 6 4 5 11 14 12 10 9 F 4 33 ...

Page 257: ...otor M 2 J204 UN12 Laser driver PCB M 9 J6160 M31 Image skew correction motor Y 3 J205 UN12 Laser driver PCB M 10 J6161 M29 Scanner motor YM 4 J202 UN14 Laser driver PCB Bk 11 J103 UN15 Laser driver PCB C 5 J204 UN14 Laser driver PCB Bk 12 J6166 M33 Image skew correction motor C 5 J204 UN14 Laser driver PCB Bk 13 J6165 M34 Image skew correction motor Bk 6 J205 UN14 Laser driver PCB Bk 14 J6167 M30...

Page 258: ...4 4 4 61 4 61 11 15 18 19 22 12 13 14 16 17 20 21 6 5 7 9 8 10 1 2 3 4 F 4 34 ...

Page 259: ...UN19 Drum unit new old detection PCB J5096 14 J6120 TS8 ATR sensor Bk 4 J905 UN19 Drum unit new old detection PCB 14 J5096 UN46 Developing sub bias PCB Bk 5 J601 UN20 Process unit relay PCB 15 J6115 UN23 Y pre exposure LED PCB front 6 J602 UN20 Process unit relay PCB 16 J6147 UN24 Y pre exposure LED PCB rear 6 J602 UN20 Process unit relay PCB 17 J6148 UN26 M pre exposure LED PCB rear 7 J603 UN20 P...

Page 260: ...4 4 4 63 4 63 18 14 10 6 17 20 16 12 8 19 15 11 7 4 3 2 1 13 9 5 F 4 35 ...

Page 261: ... 2 J659 UN40 Toner sensor relay PCB M 11 J6037 PS2 Toner supply sensor M 2 J659 UN40 Toner sensor relay PCB M 12 J6036 TS2 Piezo sensor M 3 J660 UN41 Toner sensor relay PCB C 13 J6152 PS7 Toner container cam HP sensor C 3 J660 UN41 Toner sensor relay PCB C 14 J6041 PS11 Toner cap position sensor C 3 J660 UN41 Toner sensor relay PCB C 15 J6040 PS3 Toner supply sensor C 3 J660 UN41 Toner sensor rela...

Page 262: ...4 4 4 65 4 65 14 15 9 43 1 4 8 11 41 7 10 17 42 13 12 6 5 3 40 2 34 30 33 29 38 21 19 26 16 45 44 37 31 36 35 32 49 28 48 47 20 24 22 39 23 50 18 25 27 46 F 4 36 ...

Page 263: ... cable TBD Option 14 J1006 Main controller PCB 1 USB FLASH no use 15 J1013 Main controller PCB 1 POSTPONE I F dealer only 16 J1025 Main controller PCB 1 YON RISER PCI Bridge option 17 J1022 Main controller PCB 1 TPM 18 J11 Main controller PCB 2 DDR2 SDRAM M1 19 J12 Main controller PCB 2 DDR2 SDRAM M0 20 J13 Main controller PCB 2 DDR2 DIMM P 21 J14 Main controller PCB 2 38 J101 Riser PCB 22 J16 Mai...

Page 264: ...4 4 4 67 4 67 8 1 2 4 5 6 3 7 14 12 10 13 9 F 4 37 ...

Page 265: ...rts Name 1 J1002 CPU PCB Relay PCB 2 J1003 CPU PCB 8 J4001 Sub key PCB 2 J1003 CPU PCB 9 J9001 Inverter PCB 3 J1006 CPU PCB 10 J2002 Hub PCB 4 J1007 CPU PCB 11 J1 LCD 5 J1008 CPU PCB 12 J3002 Ten key PCB 6 J1009 CPU PCB 13 J3001 Ten key PCB 7 J4002 Sub key PCB 14 J5001 Volume PCB T 4 29 ...

Page 266: ...move 1 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 2 Open the HDD Lid 1 screw F 4 38 F 4 39 3 Remove the signal cable and the power cable from the HDD x2 Signal cable Power cable 4 Insert the signal cable and the power cable into the hole of the Controller Box F 4 40 F 4 41 ...

Page 267: ...move the HDD 4 screws 1 grounding plate 4 spacers 4 vibration prevention dumpers x4 HDD HDD fixing plate Spacers Vibration prevention dumpers HDD grounding plate Caution At installation install the grounding plate inside the A part of HDD Fixing Plate A A Grouding Plate Grouding Plate F 4 45 F 4 44 ...

Page 268: ...r Power Cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader power cable Cable guide Wire saddles F 4 46 F 4 47 2 Remove the USB cable and the control panel communication cable x2 Control panel communication cable USB cable 3 Remove the 2 screws and lift the grip x2 Grips 4 Hold the grip and remove the Main Controller PCB 1 Main controller PCB 1 MEMO If option PCB is installed r...

Page 269: ...he upper area and install it x2 x2 Connectors Reader power cable Cable guide Wire saddles F 4 52 MEMO Make sure that the Main Controller PCB 1 is fixed to the device Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 Before Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 Remove the Left Rear Cover and the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 5 claws x2 x5 Claws Rubber cap Rubber cap 2 If the...

Page 270: ...move the Main Controller PCB 2 2 screws x2 Grip F 4 55 F 4 56 F 4 57 MEMO When the option PCB is installed remove it Caution At installation avoid the harness hold the grip in raised condition put the Main Controller PCB 2 all the way in tilt the grip and install it x2 Grip MEMO If the FAX Unit is installed install the connector MEMO Make sure that the Main Controller PCB 2 is fixed to the device ...

Page 271: ...ft Rear Cover Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover Remove the Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 1 claw x2 Rubber caps Rear cover Claw How to open 1 When the Reader is installed remove the reader power cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide F 4 58 x2 x2 Connectors Reader power cable Cable guide Wire saddles F 4 59 ...

Page 272: ...2 screws x2 2 2 When the FAX Unit is installed avoid the harness and open the Controller Box and the FAX Unit 3 screws x3 3 Close the Controller Box while pressing the cable with afinger Check that the cable is stored when closeing the box F 4 60 F 4 61 Cable F 4 62 ...

Page 273: ...Left Rear Sub Cover Remove the Rear Cover Remove the Rear Lower Cover 1 Remove the Connector Cover 1 screw 2 When the Cassette Pedestal is installed remove the connector 6 harness guides 5 connectors x5 x6 Harness guides Connectors F 4 63 F 4 64 3 Remove the Rear Lower Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 2 claws 2 hooks x2 Claw Claw x2 Hook Hook F 4 65 ...

Page 274: ...screws x2 x2 Screws Wire saddle Finisher laffice connector unit Connector Connector F 4 66 F 4 67 3 Pull out the Main Power Unit 3 connectors 3 screws x3 x3 Connectors Screw Main power unit Screw Screw 4 Remove the Main Power Unit 15 connectors 5 wire saddles x15 x5 Connectors Main power unit Wire saddles Wire saddles Connector 12 Connectors F 4 68 F 4 69 ...

Page 275: ...Cover How to remove 1 Remove all the connector on the PCB and remove the AC Driver 6 wire saddles 13 connectors 12 pieces for overseas model 3 screws AC Driver Screw 13 Connectors Screw Screw Wire saddles Wire saddles x3 x13 x6 F 4 70 Removing the Control Panel How to remove 1 Pull out the Control Panel and remove the mold Mold Control panel 2 Remove the stopper 2 screws x2 Stopper F 4 71 F 4 72 ...

Page 276: ...ng Cleaning Tool and clean the Dust blocking Glass from the 4 holes of the Waste Toner Container Dust blocking glass cleaning tool F 4 76 F 4 77 Removing the Dust blocking Glass Cleaning Pad Before Removing the Dust blocking Glass Cleaning Pad Open the Front Cover How to remove 1 Remove the Glass Cleaning Tool 2 Remove the Dust blocking Glass Cleaning Pad F 4 78 F 4 79 ...

Page 277: ... arrow of ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is aligned with the triangle mark If it is not aligned adjust the arrow of lever to the triangle mark Triangle mark Triangle mark ITB sub pressure release lever ITB sub pressure release lever 2 Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the right direction until the protrusion of grip is aligned with the triangle mark on the plate to release the pressure ITB pr...

Page 278: ... Thus be careful of pulling it out F 4 85 4 Pull out the ITB Unit up to the stop label position flatly 2 screws Stop label position x2 F 4 84 F 4 86 5 Hold the ITB Unit as show in the below figure and remove in the direction of the arrow Caution When installing the ITB Unit align the ITB Unit with the 2 positions at the lead edge of rail ITB unit Rails F 4 88 F 4 87 ...

Page 279: ...t flatly F 4 89 F 4 90 3 Place the paper onto the Process Unit to protect the Drum Unit from the light Paper 4 Take the 2 rails of Process Unit back to the host machine How to remove Caution Do not install the used Laser Scanner Unit 2 C Bk laser in the installation position of Laser Scanner Unit 1 Y M laser If switching the units image skew degree of Y color that is the standard color may change ...

Page 280: ...removal of Bk C Laser Scanner Unit Go through the same procedure for removing the M Y Laser Scanner Unit 1 Remove the Drum Heater 1 screw Drum heater Screw F 4 93 2 Remove the Image Formation Suction Duct 1 screw 1 claw Image formation suction duct Screw Claw When removing the Laser Scanner Unit 1 Y M laser 3 Remove the Left Upper Cover 5 rubber caps 5 screws 3 hooks 5 claws Rubber caps x5 x3 x5 C...

Page 281: ...tors Connectors x2 x2 F 4 96 F 4 97 F 4 98 Caution Since the Laser Scanner Unit needs adjustment do not disassemble it Caution At installation push the protrusion of Laser Scanner Unit into the hole of rear plate and adjust the front boss with the plate hole and install it Boss Protrusion Laser scanner unit Protrusion Hole Caution At installation pass the harness through the Sheet Guide and instal...

Page 282: ...law Claw 2 Remove the Fan Protection Plate and the Toner Filter Fan protection plate Toner filter F 4 99 F 4 100 Removing the ITB Unit Before Removing the ITB Unit Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Remove the ITB Cover 2 screws loosen Caution Do not touch the ITB surface F 4 101 F 4 102 ...

Page 283: ... ITB Pressure Release Lever in the arrow direction until the protrusion of grip is aligned with the triangle mark on the plate to release the pressure ITB pressure release lever F 4 103 F 4 104 3 Remove the 2 connectors x2 Caution When pulling out the ITB Unit it may drop because it does not click at stop position if pulled out while lifting it Thus be careful of pulling it out 4 Pull out the ITB ...

Page 284: ... to 3 minutes F 4 107 Cleaning the Patch Sensor Before cleaning the patch sensor Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Remove the ITB Cover Remove the ITB Unit How to Clean 1 While pushing the shutter clean the surface of Patch Sensor with a cotton swab moistened with water and tightly wrung by wiping it in one direction After cleaning make sure that there is no toner contam...

Page 285: ...e the ITB Unit Remove the Process Unit How to remove 1 Release the hook and remove the Shutter of the sensor 2 Claws Hook Shutter Claw F 4 109 2 Remove the Pre secondary Transfer Guide Be sure not to put too much force on the Pre secondary Transfer Guide when removing it 2 screws Grounding Cable Secondary Transfer Guide 3 Remove the mold 4 screws 4 bosses Boss F 4 110 F 4 111 ...

Page 286: ...osor center Initialization of Patch sensor center is necessary COPIER OPTION IMG MCON P ALPHA Input Patch Sensor alpha value F 4 112 F 4 113 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit Before removing the ITB Cleaning Unit Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Remove the ITB Cover Remove the ITB Unit How to remove Caution When removing installing it do not contact the ITB Cleaning Unit t...

Page 287: ...This service mode will take approx 2 to 3 minutes F 4 115 Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit Before removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Remove the ITB Cover Remove the ITB Unit Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit How to remove 1 Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit and put it on the paper 1 screw MEMO Hold the screw area of 2 screws on the ITB...

Page 288: ...ion sheet 2 After installing the ITB Cleaning Unit to the ITB Unit apply tospearl on the whole area indicated in the figure below Caution When applying tospearl be careful not to scatter it on inside of the ITB the Drive Roller and the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller If it is scattered on inside of the ITB the Drive Roller or the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller wipe it with lint free paper moisten...

Page 289: ...e approx 2 to 3 minutes Removing the ITB Before removing the ITB Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Remove the ITB Cover Remove the ITB Unit Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit Caution Do not tough the surface of ITB If needed hold the ITB within 10mm from both edge of the belt How to remove 1 Turn over the ITB Unit 2 Remove the Push Slider 1 stop ring 3 Pull the ITB Pressure Re...

Page 290: ...over upside down on the place where the ITB Unit will be stood F 4 119 F 4 120 6 Lift the ITB and stand it on the ITB Cover Caution Make sure that it is removed from the front and rear hooks Make sure to align the claw of the ITB Cover with the cut off of protection sheet 2 claws x2 Hooks ITB cover Claws Claw F 4 121 ...

Page 291: ...the ITB within 10mm from the edge and remove it upward 10mm 10mm Caution Do not touch the surface of ITB Drive Roller Secondary Transfer Inner Roller and Primary Transfer Roller as it may cause the image failure 10 To execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection make the main body in standby state 11 Execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P ITB INIT Leve...

Page 292: ...ow to remove Caution Do not touch the surface of Drive Roller Secondary Transfer Inner Roller and Primary Transfer Roller as it may cause the image failure 1 Pull out the pin make the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit straight and install the removed pin 2 Remove the ITB Unit from the ITB Cover and place it onto the paper in the position where the roller is placed upside 2 claws Paper ITB unit ...

Page 293: ... 4 128 Caution Wind paper on the Primary Transfer Roller Bk and without touching the surface of the roller Do not touch the roller surface Primary transfer roller BK Paper Caution Hold the stopper with finger lightly after installation to check that the claw is surely installed 5 To execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection make the main body in standby state 6 Execute the ITB Equilibrium Pos...

Page 294: ... Do not touch the surface of Drive Roller Secondary Transfer Inner Roller and Primary Transfer Roller as it may cause the image failure 1 Pull out the pin make the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit straight and install the removed pin 2 Remove the ITB Unit from the ITB Cover and place it onto the paper 2 claws Paper ITB unit ITB cover Claws x2 3 Turn the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever to make t...

Page 295: ...installation Caution Wind paper on the Primary Transfer Roller C and without touching the surface of the roller Do not touch the roller surface Primary transfer roller C Paper Caution After installing the Primary Transfer Roller C M Y turn the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever to make sure that the Primary Transfer Roller C M Y moves up and down After checking be sure to make the Primary Transfer Rol...

Page 296: ... Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Before removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Remove the ITB Cover Remove the ITB Unit Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit How to remove Caution Do not touch the surface of Drive Roller Secondary Transfer Inner Roller and Primary Transfer Roller as it may cause the image failure F 4 135 ...

Page 297: ...from the ITB Cover and place it onto the paper in the position where the roller side faces up 2 claws Paper ITB unit ITB cover Claws x2 F 4 136 F 4 137 3 Remove the Grounding Plate and the Secondary Transfer Bearing Holder 1 screw Grounding plate Secondary transfer bearing holder 4 Remove the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller F 4 138 F 4 139 ...

Page 298: ...ER FUNCTION MISC P ITB INIT Level 1 This service mode will take approx 2 to 3 minutes Reinstalling the ITB Before reinstalling the ITB Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Remove the ITB Cover Remove the ITB Unit Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit How to reinstall 1 Check that the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is in the below position ITB sub pressure release lever 2 Stand the I...

Page 299: ... 10mm from the edge and install it by aligning it with the marking line 10mm 10mm Marking line F 4 142 F 4 143 Caution Make sure to install it by hooking the ITB Displacement Sensor Lever onto the ITB edge 5 Pull out the pin make the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit straight and install the removed pin 1 screw F 4 144 ...

Page 300: ...2 7 Install the rear pin 1 screw F 4 145 F 4 146 8 Push the ITB Pressure Release Lever and install the Bush Slider to the boss 1 stop ring Caution Make sure that there is no gap between the ITB Pressure Release Lever and the Plate space 9 Install the harness 1 edge saddle 3 wire saddles F 4 147 ...

Page 301: ...y state 13 Execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P ITB INIT Level 1 This service mode will take approx 2 to 3 minutes Removing the Recycle Toner Bottle Before removing the Recycle Toner Bottle Open the Front Cover How to remove 1 Release the Recycle Toner Bottle Lock Lever 2 Remove the Recycle Toner Bottle Caution Do not tilt the Recycle Toner Bottle Beca...

Page 302: ...ot aligned align the arrow of lever with the triangle mark of plate Triangle mark Triangle mark ITB sub pressure release lever ITB sub pressure release lever F 4 150 2 Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the right direction and release the pressure Caution When releasing the pressure of ITB Pressure Release Lever make sure that the protrusion of grip is aligned with the triangle mark of plate I...

Page 303: ...s Unit Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Remove the ITB Cover Pull out the Process Unit How to remove Caution When installing removing the Process Unit do not remove the Recycle Toner Bottle 1 Remove the 4 stepped screws fixed on the right and left rails x4 2 Hold the front and rear of Process Unit and remove it flatly F 4 154 F 4 155 ...

Page 304: ...ter is closed before installation F 4 156 F 4 157 Reinstalling the Process Unit Before reinstalling the Process Unit Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Remove the ITB Cover Pull out the Process Unit Remove the Process Unit How to reinstall 1 Pull out the 2 rails of Process Unit from the host machine 2 Align the 4 protrusions of Process Unit with the positioning pin of rai...

Page 305: ... to the host machine and fix it with 2 screws x2 Caution After closing the Process Unit hold the edge of each Drum Unit from above as described below If the Drum Unit is not secured it may cause the color displacement 5 Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the left direction to apply the pressure Caution When applying the pressure of ITB Pressure Release Lever make sure that the protrusion of gr...

Page 306: ...er F 4 162 F 4 163 Removing the Drum Unit Before removing the Drum Unit Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Remove the ITB Cover Pull out the Process Unit How to remove Caution Do not touch the drum surface 1 Hold the grip with both hands press the Drum Unit against the Developing Assembly and pull it out vertically Grips F 4 164 ...

Page 307: ... the Drum Unit Before reinstalling the Drum Unit Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Remove the ITB Cover Pull out the Process Unit Remove the Drum Unit How to reinstall Caution Do not touch the drum surface 1 Hold the grip and install it from the top vertically Grips F 4 165 ...

Page 308: ... of process unit Guide of drum unit Caution Since the rail may be broken make sure that the shutter is surely slid on the rail Shutter Rail Shutter Rail F 4 166 MEMO When installing the Drum Unit Bk to the host machine perform the following procedures 2 1 Place the half fold paper included in the packaging box on the Developing Assembly Bk Be sure to set the edge of half fold paper over the Toner ...

Page 309: ...er Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Remove the ITB Cover Pull out the Process Unit Remove the Drum Unit Remove the Recycle Toner Bottle How to remove MEMO This procedure describes the removal of Bk Developing Assembly Go through the same procedure for removing the Y M C Developing Assembly Caution When installing removing it do not touch the Developing Sleeve Caution When installing removin...

Page 310: ...ending on the color If 4 colors are replaced simultaneously execute INISET 4 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET Y Initialization of Y Developing Assembly toner ratio and patch COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET M Initialization of M Developing Assembly toner ratio and patch COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET C Initialization of C Developing Assembly toner ratio and patch COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET K Initi...

Page 311: ...ping Assembly to the Process Unit in the reverse procedure of Removing the Developing Assembly 2 While holding the Developing Assembly with one hand pull out the developing seal straight up with other hand Perform this procedure for each color F 4 171 Caution When removing the Seal on the Developing Assembly be sure to lift it slowly and vertically If lifting it in an oblique direction the Seal on...

Page 312: ... the upper side of each Developing Assembly when removing the seal Otherwise the cover will be off from its position F 4 172 Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit Before removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover How to remove Caution Do not touch the ...

Page 313: ...claws x4 4 Remove the Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit 1 bushing 2 springs Bushing Secondary transfer separation guide unit Spring Spring F 4 174 F 4 175 5 Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 2 bearing holders 2 bearings Secondary transfer outer roller Bearing holder Bearing Bearing holder Bearing F 4 176 ...

Page 314: ...ration Guide Unit How to remove Caution Do not touch the surface of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 1 Fit the side with longer shaft to the hole of Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit and install the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Longer shaft Shorter shaft Hole Caution After installing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller make sure that the bearing holder can rotate F 4 177 2 Fit the protrus...

Page 315: ...he rear stopper MEMO When replacing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller execute the service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING TNR COAT F 4 179 Removing the Toner Bottle manually Before Removing the Toner Bottle manually Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw Claw x3 Remove the Left Rear Cover Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 5 claws...

Page 316: ... 1 hook Hook Left rear sub cover F 4 182 F 4 183 Remove the Rear Cover 3 rubber caps 3 screws 1 claw x2 Rubber caps Rear cover Claw Open the Controller Box 1 When the Reader is installed remove the reader power cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader power cable Cable guide Wire saddles F 4 184 F 4 185 ...

Page 317: ...r Box and the FAX Unit 3 screws x3 F 4 186 F 4 187 How to remove MEMO This procedure describes the procedure of Toner Bottle Bk Go through the same procedure for Toner Bottle C M Y 1 Open the Toner Replacement Cover 2 Remove the handle 1 screw Screw 3 Install the handle to the shaft 4 Turn the handle like ratchet and open the small cover F 4 188 F 4 189 ...

Page 318: ...ive Unit Before Removing the Main Drive Unit Remove the Right Rear Cover Remove the Left Rear Cover Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover Remove the Rear Cover Open the Controller Box Remove the Rear Lower Cover 1 Remove the Connector Cover 1 screw 2 When the Cassette Pedestal is installed remove the connector 5 connectors 6 harness guides x5 x6 Harness guides Connectors F 4 191 F 4 192 ...

Page 319: ... 2 hooks x2 Claw Claw x2 Hook Hook F 4 193 How to remove 1 Remove the Left Upper Cover 5 rubber caps 5 screws x5 Rubber caps Left upper cover 2 When the FAX Unit is installed open the Controller Box and the FAX Unit while avoiding the harness 3 screws x3 Harness F 4 194 F 4 195 ...

Page 320: ...Drum Driver PCB 3 screws x3 Drum driver PCB F 4 196 F 4 197 5 Remove the Harness Guide Cover 2 screws Harness guide cover x2 Pull out the harness of Laser Scanner and make a space by hooking the claw of harness guide 1 edge saddle 1 claw Claw Harness Edge saddle F 4 198 F 4 199 ...

Page 321: ...s Connectors x8 F 4 200 F 4 201 8 Remove all the red connectors from the Drum Driver PCB 10 connectors 10 wire saddles Connectors Connectors Connectors Wire saddles Wire saddles Wire saddle Drum driver PCB Wire saddles Connectors Wire saddles x10 x10 9 Remove the Main Drive Unit 2 connectors 6 screws Main drive unit x2 x6 Connectors F 4 202 F 4 203 ...

Page 322: ...ner Replacement Cover 2 Execute the service mode and release the lock of Toner Container 3 Turn OFF the power before closing the Small Cover and the Toner Replacement Cover 4 Close the 4 Small Covers and the Toner Replacement Cover Same in manual operation Remove the ITB Unit Remove the Process Unit How to remove 1 Remove the Front Right Cover 1 rubber cap 1 screw remove 1 screw loosen Loosen Fron...

Page 323: ... Right Cover 5 Remove the Delivery Tray 6 Open the 4 Small Covers and remove the 4 Toner Containers F 4 207 F 4 208 F 4 209 7 Remove the Toner Container Front Inner Cover 1 connector 1 wire saddle 4 screws RS x4 Wire saddle Connector F 4 210 ...

Page 324: ...iding the duct sheet remove the Hopper Unit 1 connector 1 wire saddle 5 screws RS Wire saddle Connector x3 x2 Duct sheet Hopper Unit F 4 211 F 4 212 Caution If it is placed sideways toner may scatter inside the Hopper and it may cause the operation failure Thus stand and put the Hopper Unit on the paper Paper F 4 213 Caution When installing the Hopper align the cut off A part of Bottle Fixing Ring...

Page 325: ...ise toner supply failure may occur Caution When replacing the Developing Assembly make sure to initialize before installing the Toner Container COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET M If install the Toner Container before initialization T D ratio cannot set the right value Removing the Hopper Y Before remove the Hopper Y Release the lock of Toner Container By service mode Remove the ITB Unit Remove the P...

Page 326: ...r Unit Wire saddle Duct sheet F 4 218 F 4 219 Caution If it is placed sideways toner may scatter inside the Hopper and it may cause the operation failure Thus stand and put the Hopper Unit on the paper Paper F 4 220 Caution When installing the Hopper align the cut off A part of Bottle Fixing Ring with the Bottle Fixing Arm B and install it to the host machine A B F 4 221 ...

Page 327: ...ure may occur Caution When replacing the Developing Assembly make sure to initialize before installing the Toner Container COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET Y If install the Toner Container before initialization T D ratio cannot set the right value Removing the Hopper C Before remove the Hopper C Release the lock of Toner Container By service mode Remove the ITB Unit Remove the Process Unit Remove th...

Page 328: ... screws P tight x2 6 Remove the rail Retaining Plate 4 screws M4 binding x4 F 4 225 F 4 226 F 4 227 7 Remove the Toner Tray 1 screw M4 binding 8 While avoiding the Duct Sheet remove the Hopper Unit 1 connector 1 wire saddle 5 screws RS x3 x2 Hopper Unit Duct sheet Connector Wire saddle F 4 228 F 4 229 ...

Page 329: ... Rod Lever with the Toner Cover Open Close Rod Lever and install it Rod lever Toner cover Open Close rod lever F 4 232 Caution When installing the removed Toner Container be sure not to shake it Caution When the Main Drive Unit is removed simultaneously make sure to install the Main Drive Unit first and then the Hopper Unit in order Otherwise toner supply failure may occur Caution When replacing t...

Page 330: ...Bk Remove the Toner Container Front Inner Cover Remove the Hopper C How to remove 1 Remove the Harness from the Fixing Guide Guide Harness 2 Remove all the Toner Trays 3 screws M4 binding x3 3 Remove the Duct Sheet F 4 233 F 4 234 2 screws binding x2 4 Remove the Hopper Unit 1 connector 1 wire saddle 6 screws RS 3 fixing guides x4 x2 x3 Connector Fixed guide Wire saddle F 4 235 F 4 236 ...

Page 331: ... Lever with the Toner Cover Open Close Rod Lever and install it Rod lever Toner cover Open Close rod lever F 4 238 Caution When installing the removed Toner Container be sure not to shake it Caution When the Main Drive Unit is removed simultaneously make sure to install the Main Drive Unit first and then the Hopper Unit in order Otherwise toner supply failure may occur Caution When replacing the D...

Page 332: ...he screws Loosen the screws Fixing Rail Fixing Rail F 4 239 F 4 240 2 Pinch and pull out the tab of Fixing Assembly Tabs 3 Hold the grip and remove the Fixing Assembly Caution Be sure to insert the Fixing Assembly until it stops at the time of installation In case of the faulty installation of the Fixing Assembly either E009 or noise may occur If so remove the Fixing Assembly and install it again ...

Page 333: ...sure Roller 1 Change the direction of the Fixing Assembly Place it in the position where the Drawer connector side faces up 2 Remove the harness 3 connectors 6 harness guides Connectors Drawer connector Harness guides Harness guides Harness x3 x8 F 4 243 3 Remove the Shutter Unit 4 screws x4 4 Turn the pressure gear with hand and make the Pressure Roller engaged condition Pressure roller engaged c...

Page 334: ... 6 Remove the left and right Fixing Plates and the Terminal Plate 3 screws x3 Fixing Plates Terminal Plate F 4 246 F 4 247 7 Remove the harness from the harness guide and remove the Film Unit 8 Remove the Separation Guide from the Film Unit 2 leaf springs F 4 248 F 4 249 ...

Page 335: ...t Remove the Film Unit How to Clean 1 Clean the Fixing Separation Guide with lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 4 250 Cleaning the Shutter Cover Before Cleaning the Shutter Cover Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Remove the Fixing Unit Remove the Film Unit How to Clean 1 Clean the Shutter Cover with lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 4 251 ...

Page 336: ... Pressure Roller 1 Remove the Fixing Inlet Guide 1 claw 1 screw 3 hooks Fixing inlet guide Claw Hook Hooks F 4 252 Caution At installation install it after fitting the 3 hooks to the notches F 4 253 2 When installing removing it to prevent the Pressure Roller from being damaged insert the paper approx 5mm under the Fixing Delivery Lower Guide to make a space between the Inner Delivery Guide and th...

Page 337: ...s from the Pressure Roller Unit 2 bearing holders 1 E ring 1 gear E ring Gear Pressure roller bearing Pressure roller bearing Bearing holder Bearing holder Roller unit F 4 255 F 4 256 Caution When keeping the Fixing Assembly for long periods turn the pressure gear and make the Pressure Roller disengaged condition Pressure roller disengaged condition F 4 257 ...

Page 338: ...ean 1 Clean the Transfer Guide with the lint free paper moistened with alcohol Secondary transfer guide F 4 258 F 4 259 Cleaning the Feed Contact Point Guide Before cleaning the Feed Contact Point Guide Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover How to Clean 1 Clean the Feed Contact Point Guide with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Feed contact point guide F 4 260 ...

Page 339: ...th alcohol while rotating it Registration roller F 4 261 F 4 262 Cleaning the Pre registration Guide Assembly Before cleaning the Pre registration Guide Assembly Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover How to Clean 1 Clean the inside of Pre registration Guide Assembly with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Secondary Transfer Guide Pre registration Guide Assembly 2 Clean the outside o...

Page 340: ...tion Transparency sensor 2 Clean the Prism with lint free paper Prism F 4 265 F 4 266 Cleaning the Vertical Path Sensor and the Lightproof Sheet Before cleaning the Vertical Path Sensor and the Lightproof Sheet Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover How to Clean 1 Clean the Vertical Path Sensor with dry lint free paper Vertical Path Sensor 2 Clean the Lightproof Sheet with dry lint free ...

Page 341: ...he outside of Fixing Delivery Guide Assembly with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Fixing delivery guide F 4 269 F 4 270 Cleaning the Post fixing Roller Before cleaning the Post fixing Roller Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover How to Clean 1 Open the Fixing Delivery Guide 2 Clean the Post fixing Roller 1 with lint free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating it Post fixing ...

Page 342: ...very roller 3 Clean the Fixing Delivery Roller 2 with lint free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating it Fixing delivery roller F 4 273 F 4 274 Cleaning the Duplex Feed Upper Roller Wheel Before cleaning the Duplex Feed Upper Roller Wheel Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover How to Clean 1 Open the Right Lower Cover 2 Clean the Duplex Feed Upper Roller Wheel with lint free paper ...

Page 343: ...aper moistened with alcohol while rotating it Duplex feed lower rollers Duplex feed lower wheels F 4 277 F 4 278 Cleaning the First Second and Third Delivery Roller Before cleaning the First Second and Third Delivery Roller Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover How to Clean 1 Clean the First Second and Third Delivery Rollers with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Second and Third d...

Page 344: ...ing the Second and Third Delivery Unit Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover How to remove 1 Remove the Front Right Cover 1 rubber cap 1 screw remove 1 screw loosen Loosen Front right cover Rubber cap 2 Remove the Reverse Trail Edge Guide and the Inner Delivery Cover 1 screw 2 hooks Reverse trail edge guide Hooks x2 Inner delivery cover F 4 284 F 4 285 ...

Page 345: ...s Wire saddles 4 Remove the Second and Third Delivery Unit 4 screws x4 Second and third delivery unit F 4 286 F 4 287 Caution After installing the Second and Third Delivery Unit make sure that the Sensor Flag in 1 place works normally Second delivery sensor Sensor flag F 4 288 ...

Page 346: ...ight Lower Cover Latch 2 screws x4 Right lower cover latch Right upper cover latch 3 Open the Fixing Assembly and remove the Fixing Gear Cover 1 screw Fixing gear cover Fixing assembly F 4 289 F 4 290 4 Remove the First Delivery Unit 2 screws 1 stepped screw x3 First delivery unit Caution At installation align the First Delivery Sensor and the Sensor Flag and install it First delivery sensor First...

Page 347: ...he 2 Sensor Flags work normally First delivery sensor First delivery sensor Sensor flag F 4 293 Removing the Duplex Unit Before removing the Duplex Unit Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover How to remove 1 Remove the Front Cover of Right Unit 1 screw 1 claw Claw F 4 294 ...

Page 348: ...crew 1 wire saddle Connectors Wire saddle Grounding wire x２ 3 Hold the sides of Duplex Unit and remove it F 4 295 F 4 296 Caution When removing the Duplex Unit note that the Right Door Rotation Hinge and the spring are easily disassembled Right door rotation hinge Spring F 4 297 ...

Page 349: ...ove 1 Remove the Both Angle Guide 2 screws x2 2 Remove the gear 2 stop rings and the bushing Gear Stop rings Bushing F 4 298 F 4 299 3 Tilt the shaft pull the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller and remove it Shaft Multi purpose tray pickup roller Caution At installation be sure to fit the Split Pin into the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller Split pin Multi purpose tray pickup roller F 4 301 F 4 300 ...

Page 350: ...d Guide 2 screws 3 claws MEMO Lift the Front and Middle Feed Guides push them into the rear and pull them out toward front Claws x2 Middle feed guide Claws Front feed guide x3 F 4 302 2 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller 1 claw Multi purpose tray separation roller Claw Caution Points to note at installation Align the groove of Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller with the protrusion o...

Page 351: ...ay Pickup Sensor Flag is surely installed Sensor flag Bearing part Bearing part Removing the Pickup Roller Before removing the Pickup Roller Remove the Cassette MEMO This procedure describes the step of cassette 1 Go through the same procedure for cassette 3 and 4 if the Cassette Pedestal is installed Push the release button and remove the cassette How to remove MEMO This procedure describes the r...

Page 352: ... Feed Roller Remove the Cassette How to remove MEMO This procedure describes the removing steps of cassette 1 Feed Roller Go through the same procedure for the Feed Roller of cassette 2 Caution Do not touch the surface of Pickup Roller and the Separation Roller 1 Remove the cassette 1 and cassette 2 2 Remove the Cassette Feed Roller 1 tab F 4 306 ...

Page 353: ...Remove the cassette 1 and cassette 2 2 Remove the Separation Roller 1 tab F 4 307 Removing the Pickup Assembly Idler Gear Before removing the Pickup Assembly Idler Gear Remove the Cassette Remove the Pickup Roller Remove the Feed Roller How to remove MEMO This procedure describes the removing procedure of cassette 1 Pickup Assembly Idler Gear Go through the same procedure for the Pickup Assembly I...

Page 354: ... cover 3 2 2 When the Cassette Pedestal is not installed remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 1 and the Right Front Cover 3 1 screw 3 Right front cover 3 Right lower sub cover 1 Claw 3 Open the Cassette Right Upper Cover and the Cassette Right Lower Cover F 4 309 F 4 310 4 Open the Right Upper Cover and the Right Lower Cover 5 Remove the Right Rear Cover 3 3 claws 1 hook Right rear cover 3 Claws Claw ...

Page 355: ...remove the Right Lower Cover Wire Right lower cover F 4 314 F 4 315 How to remove 1 Lift the lever and remove the Right Front Inner Cover 2 screws D x2 Right front inner cover Lever 2 Remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 2 and remove the Right Rear Inner Cover 2 screws x2 x2 Right rear inner cover Claws Right lower sub cover 2 F 4 316 F 4 317 ...

Page 356: ...it F 4 318 F 4 319 Removing the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit Before removing the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit Remove the Cassette Remove the Right Lower Cover How to remove 1 Pull out the cassette 2 2 Remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 2 and remove the Right Rear Inner Cover 2 screws x2 x2 Right rear inner cover Claws Right lower sub cover 2 3 Remove the Pickup Harness 1 wire saddle 1 edge saddle 2 connectors x...

Page 357: ...the removing steps of Cassette 1 Size Detection Unit Go through the same procedure for Cassette 2 Size Detection Unit When removing the Cassette 1 Size Detection Unit make sure to remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit When removing the Cassette 2 Size Detection Unit make sure to remove the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit 1 Remove the Cassette 1 Size Detection Unit 1 connector 1 wire saddle 2 screws x2 Cassette...

Page 358: ...t first and then remove the Reader Unit because the accuracy of scanner systems may be deteriorated 1 Open the ADF 2 Remove the Reader Cable Cover 2 screws x2 F 4 324 F 4 325 3 Remove the cable from the wire saddle Wire saddle MEMO There is no wire saddle in case of Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 3 Remove the inner plate 4 screws x4 F 4 326 F 4 327 ...

Page 359: ...ve the flat cable in case of Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 1 reuse band 1 edge saddle 1 harness retainer 3 connectors x3 x3 F 4 329 F 4 328 Caution In case of Color Image Reader Unit B1 B2 record the position of scale of ADF mounting screw F 4 330 5 1 In case of Color Image Reader Unit B1 B2 remove the 2 screws x2 F 4 331 ...

Page 360: ...screws x4 Caution Be sure not to get scratches on the White Sheet on the removed ADF F 4 333 F 4 332 Caution Be careful not to damage the Reader Communication Cable Guide when placing it F 4 334 MEMO At installation install it in the recorded scale position of ADF mounting screw ...

Page 361: ...per plain paper to the protrusion of the stream reading glass and set it in the position where the sheet of the stream reading glass is fully covered F 4 335 Protrusion Sheet Reading position Protrusion Sheet Reading pos Paper CAUTION Do not set it in the position where the original read position is covered by the paper 2 Close the DADF 3 Pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow and check ...

Page 362: ...ion Paper CAUTION Do not set it in the position where the original read position is covered by the paper F 4 338 2 Close the DADF 3 Pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow and check that there is resistance 4 If there is no resistance execute the height adjustment F 4 339 ...

Page 363: ... screw 2 Check the height again and make sure that the height is appropriate F 4 340 Right Angle Adjustment MEMO There are 2 adjustment methods for front side reading reader side scanner unit and for back side reading DADF side scanner unit a Adjustment for front side reading 1 Set a test chart to DADF and make a 1 sided print 2 Check the right angle accuracy of angle A on the printed paper If it ...

Page 364: ... test chart again and check that angle A is right angle F 4 342 b Adjustment for back side reading 1 Set a test chart to DADF upside down and make a 2 sided print 2 Check the right angle accuracy of angle A on the printed paper If it is not right angle make an adjustment Image on test chart Printed image Feed direction 3 Remove the front cover 4 Loosen the adjustment screw 5 Adjust the position of...

Page 365: ... the Reader Unit from the host machine make sure to remove the ADF Unit first and then remove the Reader Unit since the accuracy of scanner systems may be deteriorated 1 Remove the Reader Left Cover 2 claws 2 screws binding M4x8 2 rubber caps x2 x2 Reader left cover Rubber caps Claws 2 Install the fixing screw of scanner system kept at the installation screw binding M4x8 x2 F 4 345 F 4 346 ...

Page 366: ...se Cover in the direction of the arrow 1 screw F 4 347 F 4 348 6 Remove the screw of Reader Front Cover 2 screws 1 screw flat head M4x6 for Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 only x3 flat head M4x6 7 Remove the Reader Front Cover 3 bosses 8 Remove the front side of Reader Unit with a stubby screwdriver 2 screws TP M4x8 x2 x2 Plate Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 Color Image Reader Unit B1 B2 F 4 ...

Page 367: ...ng Hook C and the Reader Fixing Hook A 2 screws binding M4x8 x2 Fixing hook C Protrusion Protrusion Protrusion Reader fixing hook A 13 Remove the connector of reader communication cable 14 Remove the reader communication cable from the cut off of the host machine plate Cut off of the host machine plate Reader communication cable 15 Remove the 2 Reader Fixing Hooks B 2 screws flat head M4x6 x2 Prot...

Page 368: ...5 5 Adjustment Main Controller ...

Page 369: ...itch perform the following operations from Settings Registration mode In Management Settings User Management Department ID Management Page Totals be sure that ID00000001 to ID00001000 are created Set the following Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings IP Address Settings IP Address Gateway Address Subnet Mask In Management Settings User Management System Manager Information Settings Sy...

Page 370: ...em again Prohibited Operation Do not transfer the following parts to another model which has a different serial number If you fail to do so the Main Body does not activate normally and this might cause to fail the restoration Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 2 with Memory PCB installed Memory PCB T 5 3 T 5 3 Developing Assembly Adjustment procedure Initialization of Developing Assembly to...

Page 371: ...6 6 Troubleshooting Initial Check Test Print Troubleshooting items Upgrading procedure ...

Page 372: ...machine s power plug remains connected to the power outlet Checking the Paper 7 The paper is of a recommended type 8 The paper is not moist Try paper fresh out of package Checking the Placement of Paper 9 Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a specifi c level 10 If a transparency is used check to make sure that it is placed in the correct orientation ...

Page 373: ...or R D 4 16 gradations Yes Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 2 5 Full half tone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 2 6 Grid Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 2 7to9 For R D 10 MCYBk horizontal stripes sub scanning direction Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 2 11 For R D 12 64 gradation Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 2 13 For R D 14 Full color 16 gradation Yes Yes Main controller PCB 2 15to100 For ...

Page 374: ... density MEMO 1 Select service mode COPIER TEST PG and specify developing color COLOR Y M C K to output the print by developing color 2 To change the density of test print select service mode TEST PG DENS Y M C K and set the density Check item Check method Assumed cause Transfer failure Check that the transfer failure does not appear on entire image Failure of ITB scratch dirt Failure of Primary T...

Page 375: ...re of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Dirt on Laser Light Path T 6 5 T 6 5 MCYBk horizontal stripe TYPE 10 2 5 1 5mm 1 5mm 4 0 1 5 1 0mm F 6 4 F 6 4 This test print is for mainly checking the dark area density of each color each color balance and white line on development Check items Check method Assumed cause Uneven density Check that uneven density does not appear on solid area of each color Fai...

Page 376: ...white line on entire image Failure of Developing Assembly T 6 7 T 6 7 Full color 16 gradations TYPE 14 Light areas White White F 6 6 F 6 6 This test print is for mainly checking the gray balance gradations of YMCBk singe color and fogging Check item Check method Assumed cause Gradation Check that 64 gradations density is properly reproduced in each color Failure of Drum Unit end of life Failure of...

Page 377: ... 6 x T 6 9 T 6 9 Image Faults Image fogging due to the electrostatic charge failure Occurrence area Between the Primary Charging Roller and the drum Cause When the solid image of Y color is copied under the high temperature and high humidity environment uneven discharge may occur between the Primary Charging Roller and the drum As a result there is a possibility that a mottled image may occur on o...

Page 378: ...ause In case that the image pattern which has extreme shading differences is copied under the high temperature and high humidity environment the deterioration toner of a previous image may adhere on a developing cylinder For this reason the inversion residual image negative ghost of the previous image may occur in the next image Occurrence condition In case that the image pattern with extreme shad...

Page 379: ...e images with lowering the setting value one step by one step F 6 9 F 6 9 Uneven Image Density at 95 mm of Paper Leading Edge About 95mm Occurrence area Fixing Unit Cause Usually the paper which passed the Fixing Unit is fed to the Inner Feed Roller along with the separation guide However when thin paper is used since the elasticity of the paper is low there is a possibility that the paper may be ...

Page 380: ... If pushing the drum unit to the Developing Assembly in installation there is a possibility to catch the Mylar sheet of the Developing Assembly downward As a result since an optical path is shut when the laser for the applicable color is irradiated the image may become light Occurrence condition The installation failure of the drum unit F 6 11 F 6 11 Remedy When installing the Drum Unit Bk to the ...

Page 381: ...the blank area caused by Secondary Transfer failure may occur Occurrence condition In case that the recycled paper having bad surface nature is used under the high temperature and high humidity environment This phenomenon will be more obvious when a blue solid image is copied Remedy Please perform the following steps 1 Check environmental classification inside the machine Indication of inside envi...

Page 382: ...2 83 105g 1 2TR HN1 2TR HN2 2 2TR HN12 2TR HN22 3 2TR HN13 2TR HN23 Thin Paper 52 64g 1 2TR T1 2TR T2 2 2TR T12 2TR T22 3 2TR T13 2TR T23 Recycled Paper 1 2TR R1 2TR R2 2 2TR R12 2TR R22 3 2TR R13 2TR R23 Heavy paper 1 106 163g 1 2TR H1 2TR H2 2 2TR H12 2TR H22 3 2TR H13 2TR H23 Heavy paper 2 164 209g 1 2TR SH1 2TR SH2 2 2TR SH12 2TR SH22 3 2TR SH13 2TR SH23 Heavy paper 3 210 256g 1 2TR UH1 2TR UH...

Page 383: ...nlet Guide is deteriorated and resin part may be scraped As a result when the leading edge of paper enters the Fixing Inlet Guide it is trapped by the scraped rib and the paper deflects leading to the wrinkle at the trailing edge of paper Condition When making 2 sided copies of solid image continuously in high temperature high humidity environment Field Remedy Replace the Fixing Inlet Guide F 6 16...

Page 384: ... with 2 colors curled leading edge of paper on 2nd side may contact with the Delivery Flapper Thus movement of this paper changes and it may touch the leading edge of Fixing Separation Guide As a result oil attached to the leading edge of guide may appear on the image Condition With using the Fixing Assembly that is used over a prolonged period when making 2 sided solid print with 2 colors Field R...

Page 385: ...acts with the heater surface when it rotates and noise may be generated Field Remedy By pushing the Fixing Film area grease inside the film circulates and sliding performance will be improved Operation procedure is as below 1 Remove the Fixing Unit 2 Change the direction of the Fixing Assembly Place the Fixing Assembly where the Drawer Connecter faces up Drawer connector 3 While pushing the Fixing...

Page 386: ... the host machine Productivity decrease at stack delivery in thin paper 52g m2 63g m2 mode Staple Finisher C1 Saddle Stitch Finisher C1 Location Process Tray on the Staple Finisher C1 Saddle Stitch Finisher C1 Cause When the thin paper 52g m2 to 63g m2 is selected and the paper stack is delivered from the corresponding finisher electrostatic is generated under the low humidity environment because ...

Page 387: ...ation file MEDIA Service Mode contents SMCNT DC controller DCON Boot program FLASH WebDAV contents WebDAV Key and certificate for encryption communication iAXXXX KEY Image scanning options Reader controller 2 sided reversal scan type iAC5051 RCONS Yes Reader controller 2 sided simultaneous scan type RCOND Pickup delivery options Finisher controller external type Fin_C1 FIN_CON Yes Staple Finisher ...

Page 388: ...is also available 3 Auto Identification of Download Mode Identify the download mode normal mode safe mode and indicate the message if changing the download mode is needed XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Initialization Function for Service Mode Password A function added from SST Ver 4 11 In case the service mode password is forgotten it is used to initialize it XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX...

Page 389: ...7 7 Error Code Overview Error Code Jam Code Alarm Code ...

Page 390: ...product These are classified into 3 codes as follows Code type Explanation Reference Error code This code is displayed when an error occurs on the machine Jam code This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine Alarm code This code is displayed when a function of the machine is malfunctioned T 7 1 T 7 1 ...

Page 391: ...through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E001 0003 05 Title High temperature error detected by hardware Description Hardware detects abnormal high temperature of the Thermistor Main Thermistor 1 264 deg C Main Thermistor 2 265 deg C Sub Thermistor 1 2 280 deg C for 400 msec consecutively Remedy 1 If the detected temperature of t...

Page 392: ...r disconnection detection error Description Signal name FUSER_CNCTX detects disconnection for 500 msec or longer Remedy 1 Check if the Fixing Assembly is installed 2 Check connection of the connectors in Fixing Assembly 3 Check connection of DC Controller PCB UN1 Connector 4 Replace the Film Unit 5 Replace the Fixing Shutter Unit 6 Replace the DC Controller PCB UN1 E004 0001 05 Title Error in dete...

Page 393: ... Wheel 3 Replace the Drum Rotation Sensor 4 Replace the Drum Driver PCB UN4 Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E012 0X05 05 Title Failure in Drum Motor Control Description Unstable rotation of the Drum Motor Remedy 1 Check if the Drum is installed 2 Take out the Drum Rotation Sensor UN31 UN32 UN33 UN34 UN35 UN36 UN37 UN38 to clean the Sensor and the Wheel 3 Remove the Process Unit and the...

Page 394: ...llowing DISPLAY P LED DA perform cleaning first If P LED DA is 3F or more 1 Check installation of the Developing Assembly and the Drum 2 Clean the Patch Sensor UN47 UN48 UN49 Window 3 Replace the Patch Sensor 4 Replace the Drum Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E020 002X 05 Title Error in Developing Assembly Description Patch level is lower than the target lower limit although the patch ...

Page 395: ...loping Assembly 4 Check short circuit of the harness with the Toner Buffer Supply Sensor PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E020 0XB0 05 Title Error in Developing Assembly Description Error in upper limit with T D ratio at the time of print sequence Large amount of toner in the Developing Assembly Remedy Go through the following DISPLAY DENS DENS X YMCK if DENS X YMCK is s...

Page 396: ...10 05 Title Timeout error in detection of Toner Bottle Seal Release Sensor Description Failure in detection about the changes of ON OFF ON with the sensor when the cap of the Toner Container was sealed released Remedy 1 Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Main Drive Unit to check the operation 2 If the Main Drive Unit side failed to rotate check the drive to see damage of the gear etc If ...

Page 397: ...e LED PCB UN23 UN30 Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E061 0XE0 05 Title The change in current level for drum film thickness detection is too much compared to the previous time Description The change in current level for drum film thickness detection is too much compared to the previous time Remedy 1 Check with the Host Machine which generates an error to check if a wrong cartridge which...

Page 398: ...tion Item Description E075 0003 05 Title Error in full displacement of ITB rear Description ITB Displacement Sensor detects full displacement position at the rear Remedy 1 In the case that the floor surface is either warped or uneven The main body is moved to the flat surface place 2 Clear displacement of the ITB procedures are written below 3 The ITB displacement correction mechanism in the ITB u...

Page 399: ...de Location Item Description E102 0100 05 Title Faulty EEPROM of YM side Scanner Description In the case of an error in reading EEPROM in the Laser Driver YM or in the case of a wrong Laser Scanner Unit which does not match with the Host Machine Remedy 1 Turn OFF and then ON the power 2 Check the connector of the Laser Scanner Unit 1 3 Replace the Laser Scanner Unit 1 E102 0300 05 Title Faulty EEP...

Page 400: ... HOB single shot mode wrong command Description Communication failure between CPU and LSI on the DC Controller PCB UN1 Remedy 1 Turn OFF and then ON the power 2 Replace the DC Controller PCB UN1 Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E197 0X02 05 Title Error in communication of HOB single shot mode wrong address Description Communication failure between CPU and LSI on the DC Controller PCB UN...

Page 401: ...position of Scanner Home Position Sensor and Scanner Unit 4 Replace the Reader Controller PCB Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E227 0001 05 Title Power supply 24V error Description 24V port error when the power is turned ON Remedy 1 Turn OFF and then ON the power 2 Check the connection between Reader and Printer and check that the Cable is not open circuit 3 Check the 24V port of the Re...

Page 402: ...heck connection of the Sub PCB in the Controller Box Check connection and replace the DC Controller PCB UN1 Main Controller PCB 1 Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E240 0002 05 Title 3 minutes has passed since the status remained to be waiting for image output request Description No response after 3 minutes has passed since the image output request from the Main Controller to the DC Cont...

Page 403: ...Description E270 0101 05 Title Scanner Unit Paper Back VSYNC signal error This error occurs on Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 only Description Due to the VSYNC error in the Scanner Unit PCB Paper Back which communicates with Reader Controller PCB VSYNC signal is not sent appropriately so the image error occurs or the operation stops abnormally Remedy 1 Turn OFF and then ON the power 2 Check the...

Page 404: ...check that the Cables are not open circuit 3 Replace the Cable between Reader Controller PCB and DF Driver PCB 4 Replace the Reader Controller PCB 5 Replace the DF Driver PCB Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E400 0002 05 Title Communication error between Reader Controller PCB and DF Unit Description Communication error between Reader Controller PCB and DF Unit Remedy 1 Turn OFF and then...

Page 405: ...etail Code Location Item Description E413 0012 05 Title DF Disengagement Motor error Description Lead Roller 2 disengagement error Remedy 1 Open the ADF Front Cover and then check the operation of active Disengagement Motor 2 Check the physical position of Disengaging HP Sensor and its flag 3 Check that the Cable of Disengaging HP Sensor is not open circuit 4 Replace the DF Driver PCB E423 0001 05...

Page 406: ...ler does not return to the rear end assist home position when the rear end assist motor has been driven for 3 seconds Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E519 8001 05 Title Gear change home position error Description 1 The gear change home position sensor PI117 is faulty 2 The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and gear change motor is faulty 3 The gear change mechanism is faulty 4...

Page 407: ...r is physically removed 4 Check if the Stapler HP Sensor S18 failure occurs Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E531 8001 05 Title Staple home position error Description 1 The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and stapler is faulty 2 The stapler is faulty 3 The finisher controller PCB is faulty Remedy The stapler does not leave the staple home position when the staple motor has be...

Page 408: ...iption E537 8002 05 Title Rear aligning plate home position error Description 1 The aligning plate rear home position sensor PI107 is faulty 2 The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and aligning plate rear motor is faulty 3 The rear aligning plate is faulty 4 The rear aligning plate motor M104 is faulty 5 The finisher controller PCB is faulty Remedy The aligning plate does not return to al...

Page 409: ...n signal turned ON Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E540 8006 05 Title The tray 1 shift motor acceleration error Description 1 The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty 2 The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1 shift motor is faulty 3 The tray up down mechanism is faulty 4 The tray 1 shift motor M107 is faulty 5 The finisher controller PCB is faulty Remedy The lock de...

Page 410: ...lty 4 The tray 2 shift motor M105 is faulty 5 The finisher controller PCB is faulty Remedy The lock detection signal turns OFF 150 ms after the lock detection signal turned ON Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E542 8006 05 Title The tray 2 shift motor acceleration error Description 1 The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty 2 The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2 sh...

Page 411: ...3 Connector is physically removed 4 Check if the Gripper Unit HP Sensor S7 failure occurs Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E575 0001 05 Title Gripper Unit Move Motor fails to move from HP Description At initial rotation when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot move from HP it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry Remedy 1 Ch...

Page 412: ... error Description 1 The wiring between the LED PCB photosensor PCB and punch controller PCB is faulty 2 The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty 3 The punch controller PCB is faulty 4 The finisher controller PCB is faulty Remedy The voltage of the light received is 3 0 V or less even when the light emitting duty of the trailing edge sensor LED5 PTR5 has been increased to 66 or more E592 8002 05 ...

Page 413: ...en the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 4 LED4 PTR4 has been decreased to 0 Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E593 8001 05 Title Horizontal registration home position error Description 1 The horizontal registration home position PI61 is faulty 2 The wiring between the punch controller PCB and sensor is faulty 3 The horizontal registration mechanism is faulty 4 Th...

Page 414: ...oes not turn OFF when the aligning plate motor has been driven for 50 pulses Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E5F4 8001 05 Title Stitcher rear home position error Description 1 The stitcher home position sensor rear SW5 is faulty 2 The stitcher rear is faulty 3 The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty Remedy The stitching home position sensor does not turn ON when the stitch motor r...

Page 415: ...r check if 5V 12V power is supplied 3 If the above measures do not solve the problem replace the HDD and reinstall the system If there still remains the problem replace the Main Controller PCB 1 Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0002 00 Title Error in HDD Description There is no system for the main CPU Remedy 1 Start in Safe Mode then perform overall format using SST and reinstall t...

Page 416: ...D therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0102 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD or vxWorks system error Remedy 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem start in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF...

Page 417: ...ith SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0121 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in HDD connection Remedy This is the error which usually does ...

Page 418: ...nd then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 3 If there still remains the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0203 00 Title Error in HDD Description WriteAbort at startup Remedy 1 Enter the applicable CHK TYPE 1 in the partition to execute HDD CHECK duration several minutes to sev...

Page 419: ... the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0222 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 2 If the above mea...

Page 420: ...FF and then ON the main switch Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0304 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD or vxWorks system error Remedy 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem start in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the Main ...

Page 421: ...ce the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0323 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the p...

Page 422: ...r the applicable CHK TYPE 1 in the partition to execute HDD CLEAR and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0410 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data c...

Page 423: ...with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0425 00 Title Error in HDD Description WriteAbort Remedy The document data such as BOX on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the applicable CHK TYPE 1 in the partition to perform HDD CHECK duration several minutes to several dozens of minutes and then turn OFF and then ON the power 2 If the...

Page 424: ...power connector 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0512 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall ...

Page 425: ... of the following BOOTDEV BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND 3 If there still remains the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0600 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD or vxWorks system error Remedy 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If the above measures do not solve t...

Page 426: ... the Main Power Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0613 00 Title Error in HDD Description WriteAbort Remedy The document data such as BOX on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the applicable CHK TYPE 2 in the partition to perform HDD CHECK du...

Page 427: ...ce the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0701 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD or vxWorks system error Remedy 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem start in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the ...

Page 428: ...he HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0714 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the probl...

Page 429: ...nd then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 3 If there still remains the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0803 00 Title Error in HDD Description WriteAbort at startup Remedy 1 Enter the applicable CHK TYPE 2 in the partition to execute HDD CHECK duration several minutes to sev...

Page 430: ... the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0822 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 2 If the above mea...

Page 431: ...FF and then ON the main switch Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0904 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD or vxWorks system error Remedy 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem start in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the Main ...

Page 432: ...ce the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0923 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the p...

Page 433: ...rall format using SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 3 If there still remains the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1005 00 Title Error in HDD Description Error in file system Remedy Recovery in Boot Partition is available ...

Page 434: ...ce the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1023 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the p...

Page 435: ...r the applicable CHK TYPE 5 in the partition to execute HDD CLEAR and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1110 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data c...

Page 436: ...with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1125 00 Title Error in HDD Description WriteAbort Remedy The document data such as BOX on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the applicable CHK TYPE 5 in the partition to perform HDD CHECK duration several minutes to several dozens of minutes and then turn OFF and then ON the power 2 If the...

Page 437: ...ally does not occur in Read Write level 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1212 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start ...

Page 438: ...DEV2 and APL_SEND 3 If there still remains the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1300 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD or vxWorks system error Remedy 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem start in Safe Mode ...

Page 439: ...ystem System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1313 00 Title Error in HDD Description WriteAbort Remedy The document data such as BOX on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the applicable ...

Page 440: ...ce the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1401 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD or vxWorks system error Remedy 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem start in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the ...

Page 441: ...he HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1414 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the probl...

Page 442: ...nd then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 3 If there still remains the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1503 00 Title Error in HDD Description WriteAbort at startup Remedy 1 Enter the applicable CHK TYPE 1 in the partition to execute HDD CHECK duration several minutes to sev...

Page 443: ... the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1522 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 2 If the above mea...

Page 444: ...FF and then ON the main switch Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1604 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD or vxWorks system error Remedy 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem start in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the Main ...

Page 445: ... to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1623 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy I...

Page 446: ...l Code Location Item Description E602 4001 00 Title Error in HDD Description No Linux system start script Remedy 1 Check the cable and the power connector 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem start in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 3 If there still remains the problem it can be c...

Page 447: ...easures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E602 FF12 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the system System Lang RUI and t...

Page 448: ...form reformat reinstallation in the case of the following BOOTDEV BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND 3 If there still remains the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E604 0000 00 Title Faulty insufficient image memory Description Insufficient memory for the model Remedy 1 Add the main memory E604 0001 00...

Page 449: ...roller PCB 2 for 1 line Fax Board or Main Controller 1 for 2 3 4 line Fax Board 1 Check connection between the FAX board and the Main controller PCB 2 Replace the Fax board 3 Replace the Main controller PCB Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E674 0004 00 Title Failure in communication of FAX board Description Failure in access of the modem IC which is used with OnBoardFax Remedy Note Main...

Page 450: ...0001 05 Title Error in register of IPC Ctrl Description Set 4 errors within 1 5 sec in register IPC chip Remedy Check the cable E713 0001 05 Title Error in IPC communication Description When receiving retransmission request for 3 times in a row Remedy Check the connector connected to the Finisher E713 0002 05 Title Error in IPC communication Description When detecting CRC error at transmission Rem...

Page 451: ...ard Reader Description Communication failed in the middle of the operation although communication with the serial New Card Reader was successful at start up Remedy Check if the cable of the serial New Card Reader is disconnected Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E730 1001 00 Title Error in PDL software Description Initialization error Remedy 1 Execute the PDL reset process 2 Turn OFF and...

Page 452: ...PCB 2 E740 0002 00 Title Failure in Ethernet Board Description Incorrect MAC address Remedy 1 Replace the LAN card E740 0003 00 Title Failure in Ethernet Board Description Incorrect MAC address Remedy 1Replace the LAN card Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E743 0000 00 Title DDI communication error Description SCI error occurrence reception data NG reception timeout SEQ timeout error Rem...

Page 453: ...Reinstallation is necessary using SST Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E746 0033 00 Title Error in engine ID of SoftID Description Error that can be recovered Remedy Recovery is available if there is a backup key due to mismatch of internal data E746 0034 00 Title Error in engine ID of SoftID Description Error that is automatically recovered Remedy To be automatically recovered at the n...

Page 454: ...9 0003 00 Title Boot command due to change in mAccele configuration Description There has been a change in configuration that needs to turn OFF and then ON the power Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the power Ecode Detail Code Location Item Description E749 0004 00 Title Boot command due to E code recovery Description There has been a change in configuration that needs to turn OFF and then ON the power...

Page 455: ... the cycle of the input voltage failure in power peripheral area of the customer Ask the customer to perform the power supply work E811 0000 05 Title Fuse cutoff error in Process Cartridge Description Fuse cannot be cut off disconnect although it is tried to be cut off Remedy 1 Turn OFF and then ON the power 2 Check the resistance value of the Fuse on Drum 3 Replace the Drum Ecode Detail Code Loca...

Page 456: ...sensor PS39 00 010C DELAY Duplex inlet sensor PS40 00 020C STNRY Duplex inlet sensor PS40 00 0A0C POWER ON Duplex inlet sensor PS40 00 0108 DELAY First delivery sensor PS41 00 0208 STNRY First delivery sensor PS41 00 0A08 POWER ON First delivery sensor PS41 00 0109 DELAY Second delivery sensor PS42 00 0209 STNRY Second delivery sensor PS42 00 0A09 POWER ON Second delivery sensor PS42 00 010B DELAY...

Page 457: ...cy sensor UN51 00 0D93 OHP NG Transparency sensor UN51 00 0113 DELAY Vertical path sensor UN53 00 0213 STNRY Vertical path sensor UN53 T 7 3 Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 Color Image Reader Unit B2 SR2 PCB4 SR5 SR3 PCB5 PCB3 SR22 SR4 PCB2 SR9 SR5 SR6 SR4 SR1 SR12 15 SR7 SR8 SR11 SR2 SR3 SR10 VR1 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID C5051 C5045 C5035 C5030 01 0090 ADF OP ADF OP 01 0091 AD...

Page 458: ...ation sensor 2 Post separation sensor 3 SR2 SR3 PCB2 01 0002 STNRY Post separation sensor 1 Post separation sensor 2 Post separation sensor 3 SR2 SR3 PCB2 01 0042 STNRY Post separation sensor 1 Post separation sensor 2 Post separation sensor 3 SR2 SR3 PCB2 01 0013 DELAY Reversing path sensor SR3 01 0053 DELAY Reversing path sensor SR3 01 0014 STNRY Reversing path sensor SR3 01 0054 STNRY Reversing...

Page 459: ...per sensor Saddle inlet sensor PI1 PI17 PI18 PI19 PI20 PI22 02 1011 DELAY Inlet sensor PI103 02 1121 STNRY Inlet sensor PI103 02 1205 RESIDUAL Inlet sensor PI103 02 1014 DELAY Feed path sensor PI104 02 1124 STNRY Feed path sensor PI104 02 1307 POWER ON Feed path sensor PI104 02 11A2 STNRY N A PI11 PI17 02 1091 DELAY No 1 paper sensor PI18 02 11A1 STNRY No 1 paper sensor No 2 paper sensor No 3 pape...

Page 460: ...S10 02 1C6F ERR Entrance roller release stopper HP sensor S5 02 1C40 ERR stack tray clock sensor S14 02 1C42 ERR Additional tray clock sensor S23 02 1CF3 ERR 02 1CF6 ERR 02 1CF1 ERR 02 1CF7 ERR 02 1001 DELAY Entrance sensor S1 02 1101 STNRY Entrance sensor S1 02 1102 STNRY Processing tray sensor S6 02 1300 POWER ON Entrance sensor Processing tray sensor S1 S6 02 1F00 Entrance sensor S1 02 1500 STP...

Page 461: ... 8 out of 10 sets of auto registration pattern Dirt on the belt and scratches were wrongly detected as a pattern and discrepancy in reading data occurred as the result 34 0003 Auto registration adjustment Timeout occurred due to unsuccess in reading 10 sets of auto registration pattern Registration detection sensor failure Registration detection sensor cleaning member covered the registration dete...

Page 462: ...S Data format error of image mode 75 0001 Error occurred in Yukon 75 0002 Error occurred due to invalid SVG analysis from Yukon 75 9101 Video transfer error CLG O1 Overrun error 75 9102 Video transfer error CLG O1 VsyncB error 75 9103 Video transfer error CLG O1 VsyncB Overrun error 75 9104 Video transfer error CLG O1 VsyncA error 75 9105 Video transfer error CLG O1 VsyncA Overrun error Location o...

Page 463: ...n error 75 B102 Video transfer error CLG O2 VsyncB error 75 B103 Video transfer error CLG O2 VsyncB Overrun error Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 75 B104 Video transfer error CLG O2 VsyncA error 75 B105 Video transfer error CLG O2 VsyncA Overrun error 75 B106 Video transfer error CLG O2 VsyncA VsyncB error 75 B107 Video transfer error CLG O2 VsyncA VsyncB Overrun error 75 B108 V...

Page 464: ...led to allocate work memory with scaler There are 3 types depending on where to occur 77 0001 PDL Fails to allocate the memory 77 0002 PDL Failure of rendering 77 0003 PDL DGL entry invalid 77 0005 PDL Other errors 77 0006 PDL DLG memory insufficient 78 0003 GL GL entry invalid 78 0005 GL System memory full 79 0001 In house developed PCL PCL initialization error 79 0002 In house developed PCL PCL ...

Page 465: ...3 0017 CanonPDF PDF error 83 0018 CanonPDF PDF analysis error Un supported transparent object exists 84 0001 XPS memory full error 84 0002 XPS spool full error 84 0003 XPS print range error 84 0004 XPS document data error 84 0005 XPS page data error 84 0006 XPS image data error 84 0007 XPS font data error 84 0008 XPS non support image error 84 0009 XPS rendering error T 7 7 T 7 7 ...

Page 466: ...8 8 Service Mode Overview BOARD COPIER FEEDER SORTER ...

Page 467: ...C Mode If MODELIST or MODELIST CLASSIC is pressed the screen will switch to initial screen for each mode F 8 1 F 8 1 Service mode item explanations Explanatory texts for the initial window main items sub items and minor items can be displayed Select the desired initial window main item sub item or minor item then pres i Information button to display an explanatory text hereafter service mode conte...

Page 468: ...sensor then press the button on the COPIER and P Sensor position Device classification Electrical parts classification 2 Then the selected electrical parts classification s mark name port number and 0 1 content will appear 3 If the i button is pressed the screen displaying the electrical parts array will appear UN53 PS33 PS38 PS47 PS37 PS42 PS41 PS40 PS43 PS39 PS34 PS36 PS35 PS55 PS56 F 8 3 F 8 3 ...

Page 469: ... CON image related and image related items other than those referred to above Image quality copy speed IMG SPD Power down sequence Cleaning CLEANING Cleaning of charging unit drum transfer roller ITB etc Environment settings ENV SET Temperature humidity environmental heater condensation log acquisition Paper feed pickup delivery FEED SW Stack performance motor speed adjustment delivery functions e...

Page 470: ...hnician Service mode COPIER Option FNC SW SM PSWD press OK button SM PSWD MEMO If Service Engineer s password is forgotten password function is cancelable by using Service Support Tool SST F 8 6 F 8 6 F 8 7 F 8 7 Switching Screen Level 1 2 Switching screens between level 1 and 2 has been made easier When level 1 screen is displayed press LEVEL 1 in the right upper side of the screen and it will sw...

Page 471: ...ry text will be displayed If English language Service Mode Content SMCNT is not installed either explanatory text can t be displayed F 8 9 F 8 9 Back up of service mode In factory setting adjustments are made for each machine and adjustment values are written in the service label When you replaced the DC controller PCB or executed the RAM clear function adjustment values for ADJUST or OPTION retur...

Page 472: ...ils To display the firmware version of Reader Controller PCB Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION PANEL Dis of Control Panel CPU PCB ROM version Lv 1 Details To display the ROM version of Control ...

Page 473: ...service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION NIB Display of network software version Lv 1 Details To display the version of the network software Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo PS PCL Displ...

Page 474: ...opriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION PUNCH Display of Puncher Unit version Lv 1 Details To display the version of Puncher Unit Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode...

Page 475: ...it Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION LANG CS Display of Czech language file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Czech language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required ti...

Page 476: ...t Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION LANG HU Display of Hungarian language file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Hungarian language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required...

Page 477: ...Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION LANG RU Display of Russian language file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Russian language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required t...

Page 478: ...ts Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION GDI UFR Display of UFR function version Lv 1 Details To display the version of UFR function Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Relate...

Page 479: ... value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION MEAP Display of MEAP contents version Lv 1 Details To display the version of MEAP contents in HDD Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Relat...

Page 480: ...d time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION TTS JA Dis of Japanese voice dictionary version Lv 1 Details To display the version of Japanese voice dictionary is displayed when no file is found Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Rela...

Page 481: ... Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION HELP Display of easy NAVI version Lv 1 Details To display the version of EASY NAVI file Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Version should be displayed for EASY NAVI function because it is an external file Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Re...

Page 482: ...rate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo ASR Automatic Speech Recognition voice recognition COPIER DISPLAY VERSION MEDIA JA Dis of Japanese media information ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Japanese media information Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj se...

Page 483: ...Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION MEDIA SK Dis of Slovak media information version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Slovak media information Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Re...

Page 484: ...propriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION MEDIA FI Dis of Finnish media information version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Finnish media information Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Require...

Page 485: ...opriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION MEDIA PT Dis of Portuguese media information ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Portuguese media information Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Require...

Page 486: ...9 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION MEDIA CR Dis of Croatian media information ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Croatian media information Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value ...

Page 487: ... character string 12 digits Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION IOCS Display of BIOS version Lv 1 Details To display the BIOS version Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Rel...

Page 488: ...ppropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION S LNG IT Dis of service mode Italian file version Lv 1 Details To display the version of Italian language file in service mode Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default ...

Page 489: ...et value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION MOBPR AP Display of mobile print JAVA UI version Lv 1 Details To display the version of the mobile print application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required ti...

Page 490: ...et value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION COPY DE Dis of COPY appli German file version Lv 1 Details To display the German language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Requi...

Page 491: ... Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION COPY DA Dis of COPY appli Danish file version Lv 2 Details To display the Danish language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target val...

Page 492: ...propriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION COPY NO Dis of COPY appli Norwegian file version Lv 2 Details To display the Norwegian language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value...

Page 493: ...propriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION COPY ID Dis of COPY appli Indonesian file ver Lv 2 Details To display the Indonesian language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value D...

Page 494: ... Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION COPY CA Dis of COPY appli Catalan file version Lv 2 Details To display the Catalan language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value ...

Page 495: ...Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION SEND TW Dis of SEND appli Chinese file ver trad Lv 2 Details To display the traditional Chinese language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate t...

Page 496: ...Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION SEND FI Dis of SEND appli Finnish file version Lv 2 Details To display the Finnish language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value D...

Page 497: ...Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION SEND RU Dis of SEND appli Russian file version Lv 2 Details To display the Russian language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value D...

Page 498: ...nit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION SEND RM Dis of SEND appli Romanian file version Lv 2 Details To display the Romanian language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target v...

Page 499: ...t value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION INTRO DE Dis of useful func intro German file ver Lv 1 Details To display the version of German language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target ...

Page 500: ... Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION INTRO DA Dis of useful func intro Danish file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Danish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 U...

Page 501: ...ropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION INTRO NO Dis useful func intro Norwegian file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Ap...

Page 502: ...ropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION INTRO ID Dis of useful func intro Indon file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Indonesian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Ap...

Page 503: ... 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION INTRO CA Dis useful func intro Catalan file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Catalan language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00...

Page 504: ...Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION CSTMN TW Dis of custom menu Chinese file ver trad Lv 2 Details To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for custom menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropri...

Page 505: ...Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION CSTMN FI Dis of custom menu Finnish file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Finnish language file for custom menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target va...

Page 506: ...Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION CSTMN RU Dis of custom menu Russian file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Russian language file for custom menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target va...

Page 507: ...t Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION CSTMN RM Dis of custom menu Romanian file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file for custom menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate targe...

Page 508: ...riate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ACSBT DE Dis of accessibility German file version Lv 1 Details To display the version of German language file for Accessibility application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value ...

Page 509: ... Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ACSBT DA Dis of accessibility Danish file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Danish language file for Accessibility application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate t...

Page 510: ...opriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ACSBT NO Dis of accessibility Norwegian file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file for Accessibility application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target va...

Page 511: ...opriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ACSBT ID Dis of accessibility Indonesian file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Indonesian language file for Accessibility application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target ...

Page 512: ...te target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ACSBT CA Dis of accessibility Catalan file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Catalan language file for Accessibility application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Defau...

Page 513: ... Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo ERS Error Recovery System COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ERS TW Display of ERS Chinese file ver trad Lv 2 Details To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for ERS application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target v...

Page 514: ...ault value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo ERS Error Recovery System COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ERS FI Display of ERS Finnish file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Finnish language file for ERS application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default valu...

Page 515: ...efault value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo ERS Error Recovery System COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ERS RU Display of ERS Russian file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Russian language file for ERS application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default va...

Page 516: ...ue Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo ERS Error Recovery System COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ERS RM Display of ERS Romanian file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file for ERS application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Defa...

Page 517: ...ult value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo UAC User Access Control COPIER DISPLAY VERSION UAC DE Display of UAC German file version Lv 1 Details To display the version of German language file for UAC application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Req...

Page 518: ... value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo UAC User Access Control COPIER DISPLAY VERSION UAC DA Display of UAC Danish file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Danish language file for UAC application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Defaul...

Page 519: ...efault value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo UAC User Access Control COPIER DISPLAY VERSION UAC NO Display of UAC Norwegian file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file for UAC application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default ...

Page 520: ...efault value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo UAC User Access Control COPIER DISPLAY VERSION UAC ID Display of UAC Indonesian file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Indonesian language file for UAC application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default va...

Page 521: ... target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo UAC User Access Control COPIER DISPLAY VERSION UAC CA Display of UAC Catalan file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Catalan language file for UAC application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target val...

Page 522: ...Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION BOX TW Dis of BOX appli Chinese file ver trad Lv 2 Details To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate ...

Page 523: ...Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION BOX FI Dis of BOX appli Finnish file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Finnish language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value ...

Page 524: ...nit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION BOX RU Dis of BOX appli Russian file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Russian language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target va...

Page 525: ...nit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY VERSION BOX RM Dis of BOX appli Romanian file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target ...

Page 526: ...o display the version of Catalan language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo T 8 2 ...

Page 527: ...3 ACC STS COPIER DISPLAY ACC STS FEEDER Display of DADF connection state Lv 1 Details To display the connecting state of DADF Use case When checking the connection between the machine and DADF Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Not connected 1 Connected Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo SORTER...

Page 528: ... RAM Display of MNCON PCB memory capacity Lv 1 Details To display the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB Use case When checking the memory capacity of the machine Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range Unit MB Appropriate target value Default value 1G Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COINROBO Dis of Coin Manager connection state Lv 1 Detail...

Page 529: ...t row When the corresponding bit for each function is 0 the function is disabled When the corresponding bit is 1 the function is enabled Use case When displaying the available PDL on the machine Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111 0 Disabled 1 Enabled bit31 BDL bit30 PS bit29 PCL bit28 PDF bit27 LIPS LIPS LX emulation bit26 N201 LIPS LX e...

Page 530: ... PCB name Lv 1 Details To display the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI2 Use case When checking name of the PCB that is connected to PCI2 Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range No PCB connected iSLOT iSLOT Wireless LAN PCB Voice Board Voice PCB Voice Board R Voice Recognition PCB Display is hidden on this machine 3DES Board Encryption PCB 1Gbit Board Giga Ethernet PCB Unit App...

Page 531: ... PCB Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range Unit MB Appropriate target value Default value 1G Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo T 8 4 ANALOG COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG TEMP Display of outside temperature Lv 1 Details To display the temperature outside the machine This is measured by the Environment Sensor 2 that detects the outside air Use case When chec...

Page 532: ...splay adj set range 0 to 300 Unit Deg C Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG FIX E2 Dis of Fixing Heater front edge temp Lv 1 Details To display the front edge temperature of the Fixing Heater detected by the Sub Thermistor 1 Use case When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Heater Adj set operate ...

Page 533: ...C Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo T 8 5 CST STS COPIER DISPLAY CST STS WIDTH MF Dis of Multi purpose Tray ppr width size Lv 2 Details To display the paper width size set on the Multi purpose Tray Use case When checking the paper width side set on the Multi purpose Tray Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range U...

Page 534: ...et value 10 to 500 Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HV STS 1ATVC C Dis pry trns paper interval current C Lv 2 Details To display the decuple value of the paper interval current lastly flown on the Primary Transfer Roller C by the primary transfer paper interval ATVC control Use case When estimating the life of Primary Transfer Roller...

Page 535: ...e Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HV STS THCK M Display of M Drum abrasion amount Lv 1 Details To display the abrasion amount of M Photosensitive Drum that is derived by the result of the drum thickness detection The result of the drum thickness detection is reflected to each control of charging development and transfer Use case When checking the adequacy of s...

Page 536: ...equired time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY CCD TARGET R Shading target value R Lv 2 Details To display the shading target value of Red Continuous display of 0 minimum or FFFF maximum is considered a failure of the Reader Controller PCB Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB At scanned image failure Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set ra...

Page 537: ...target value 16 to 246 Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY CCD GAIN EB Gain level of Img Sensor even bit B frt Lv 2 Details To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit paper front Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit Reader Controller PCB Us...

Page 538: ...33 to 195 Unit Appropriate target value 33 to 195 Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo LED cannot be replaced individually Replace the Scanner Unit COPIER DISPLAY CCD LAMP2 BW Scan Lamp intensity adj VL B W back Lv 2 Details To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit paper back in B W scanning mode Use case When image failure o...

Page 539: ...lue Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY CCD GAIN BW2 Img Sensor gain level adj VL2 B W frt Lv 2 Details To display the CMOS Sensor B W gain level adjustment value 2 of Scanner Unit paper front Use case When image failure occurs at front side scanning in B W mode Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 1 to 47 Unit Appropriate target valu...

Page 540: ...se When image failure occurs at back side scanning in B W mode Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 1 to 47 Unit Appropriate target value 1 to 47 Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY CCD GAIN2BW4 Img Sensor gain level adj VL4 B W Back Lv 2 Details To display the CMOS Sensor B W gain level adjustment value 4 of Scanner Uni...

Page 541: ...te target value 1 to 47 Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY CCD GAIN2 ER Gain level of Img Sensor even bit R bck Lv 2 Details To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit paper back Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit Reader Controller PCB Us...

Page 542: ...to 95 Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo T 8 8 DPOT COPIER DISPLAY DPOT 2TR PPR Dis of sec trns ATVC ppr allotted voltg Lv 2 Details To display the paper allotted voltage set by the latest secondary transfer Full ATVC control The appropriate range may be exceeded due to wrong media setting Use case When transfer failure occurs on certain media Adj se...

Page 543: ...value 300 to 3000 Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY DPOT 1TR DC K Dis of primary transfer voltage Bk Lv 2 Details To display the voltage lastly applied to the Primary Transfer Roller Bk Use case When transfer failure occurs due to the primary transfer Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 0 to 5000 Unit V Appropriate ta...

Page 544: ...time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY DPOT LPWR M Display of laser power M Lv 2 Details To display M laser power determined by D max control FF display with low image density is considered that the Photosensitive Drum may be nearly the end of life Use case When the image density is low Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 00 FF hexadecimal Unit ...

Page 545: ... target value 20 to 120 Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY DPOT PVCONT C Dis of target patch contrast potntl C Lv 2 Details To display the target C patch contrast potential Check the target patch contrast potential to check whether the toner supply control is properly executed at image density failure Investigate the other possible fac...

Page 546: ...100 to 100 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY DPOT VRATE K Dis of D max PASCAL Bk color Vd gain VL Lv 1 Details To display the gain for the Bk Vd set by D max PASCAL control against the environment table value Use case When image density is not appropriate Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set ran...

Page 547: ...ter power on Use case When the density greatly When the density is unstable even after gradation correction Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 7 to 7 Unit Appropriate target value 4 5 to 4 5 Default value Required time Related service mode COPIER DISPLAY DENS SGNL Y Related user mode Supplement memo DENS M Dis of M developer density change ratio Lv 1 Details To display difference...

Page 548: ...opriate target value 4 5 to 4 5 Default value Required time Related service mode COPIER DISPLAY DENS SGNL K Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY DENS DENS S Y Dis of ATR control patch density Y Lv 2 Details To display Y patch image density created by ATR control Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj set operate method Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the in...

Page 549: ...tructions from the Quality Support Division Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Unit Appropriate target value 300 to 700 Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY DENS D C TRGT Dis of ATR ctrl C patch target density Lv 2 Details To display the target density for C patch image created by ATR control Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem A...

Page 550: ...M Display of M color developer density Lv 1 Details To display the measured value of M color developer density The density is measured with the ATR Sensor M for each job The value is updated upon print operation after power on Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 0 to 255 Unit Appropriate target value 20 to 230 Default value Required t...

Page 551: ...ired time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY DENS DEV DC M Dis of developing DC voltage M Lv 2 Details To display the latest M developing DC voltage Vdc Use case When image failure occurs due to carrier adherence When fogging appears When fogging is deteriorated Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 280 to 480 Unit V Appropriate target value Defaul...

Page 552: ...mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY DENS CHG DC K Dis of Pry charge DC voltg Bk gain VL Lv 2 Details To display the latest output value of primary charging DC voltage Bk Use case When low density or fogging occurs Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1500 Unit V Appropriate target value 400 to 900 Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement me...

Page 553: ...NS Y H Dis of ATR ctrl Y clr T D ratio history Lv 2 Details To display the latest 8 Y toner density log data T D ratio detected by the ATR Sensor Y at ATR control Sharp change in values may indicate ATR Sensor disconnection failure whereas gradual change in values may indicate failure in toner supply system Use case When checking toner density in the Developing Assembly at low density or fogging d...

Page 554: ...quired time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY DENS DS S M H Dis of M clr patch image density history Lv 2 Details To display the latest 8 M patch image density log data This provides cause judgment basis for E020 occurrence etc Sharp change in values may indicate failure in Patch Sensor Shutter or laser whereas gradual change may indicate failure in toner supply...

Page 555: ...DJ execution will not correct the problem Use case When checking the Patch Sensor Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode COPIER DISPLAY DENS P SENS P Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY DENS SPL LG Y Display of Y toner supply history Lv 2 Details To display the latest 8 Y toner supply log data...

Page 556: ...t memo COPIER DISPLAY DENS SPL LG K Display of Bk toner supply history Lv 2 Details To display the latest 8 Bk toner supply log data Each data represents the number of toner blocks supplied per paper Use case When checking the toner supply status at low density or fogging deterioration Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 0 to 5 Unit Appropriate target value 0 to 5 Default value Re...

Page 557: ... TR Dis of secondary transfer environment Lv 1 Details To display the environment moisture amount of secondary transfer Use case When checking the current installation environment of the machine Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 1 to 3 Unit Appropriate target value 1 to 3 Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo Y DRM LF Display of Y Dru...

Page 558: ...OPIER DISPLAY MISC LPOWER M Display of laser light intensity M Lv 2 Details To display the M laser intensity in real time Use case When analyzing the cause of the image density failure Adj set operate method Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division Display adj set range 00 to FF Unit Hex hexadecimal Appropriate target value 50 to FF Defaul...

Page 559: ...nit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY ALARM 1 SUC A K For R D use Lv 1 Details Use case Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo SUC L Y For R D use Lv 2 Details Use case Adj set operate...

Page 560: ...Patch Sensor if not corrected Use case When hue variation occurs Adj set operate method Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Unit Appropriate target value 0 to 700 Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo TGT A M Dis of ARCDAT screen A M color target VL Lv 2 Deta...

Page 561: ...arget value 0 to 700 Default value 255 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C TGT B Y Dis of ARCDAT screen B Y color target VL Lv 2 Details To display the Y patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Che...

Page 562: ...arget value 0 to 700 Default value 255 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C TGT C Y Dis of ARCDAT screen C Y color target VL Lv 2 Details To display the Y patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Che...

Page 563: ...to 700 Default value 255 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SUM A Y Dis ARCDAT screen A Y color ctrl differ Lv 2 Details To display Y patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset target value Check the Patch Sens...

Page 564: ...ppropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SUM B Y Dis ARCDAT screen B Y color ctrl differ Lv 2 Details To display Y patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset target value Check...

Page 565: ...Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SUM C Y Dis ARCDAT screen C Y color ctrl differ Lv 2 Details To display Y patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset target value Chec...

Page 566: ...ructions from the Quality Support Division Display adj set range 1023 to 1023 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SGNL A Y Dis ARCDAT screen A Y patch current VL Lv 2 Details To display the current Y patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs or the value shown is not in the ...

Page 567: ...Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SGNL B Y Dis ARCDAT screen B Y patch current VL Lv 2 Details To display the current Y patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs or the value shown is not in the tolerable range check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer Use case When hue v...

Page 568: ...Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SGNL C Y Dis ARCDAT screen C Y patch current VL Lv 2 Details To display the current Y patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs or the value shown is not in the tolerable range check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer Use case When hue v...

Page 569: ...Y HT C DLTA A Y Dis of ARCDAT screen A Y density differ Lv 2 Details To display the difference between the Y patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not corrected Use case When hue vari...

Page 570: ...Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C DLTA B Y Dis of ARCDAT screen B Y density differ Lv 2 Details To display the difference between the Y patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute auto gradatio...

Page 571: ...Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C DLTA C Y Dis of ARCDAT screen C Y density differ Lv 2 Details To display the difference between the Y patch target value and the current value of screen C in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute auto gradatio...

Page 572: ...t value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C TGT A Y2 ARCDAT scrn A Y clr target VL 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the Y patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed Use case When checking ARCDAT control operation Adj set operate method Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Qu...

Page 573: ...ate target value 0 to 700 Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C TGT A C3 ARCDAT scrn A C color target VL 1 3 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the C patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1 3 speed Use case When checking ARCDAT control operation Adj set operate method Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instru...

Page 574: ...ate target value 0 to 700 Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C TGT B Y2 ARCDAT scrn B Y color target VL 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the Y patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed Use case When checking ARCDAT control operation Adj set operate method Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instru...

Page 575: ...ate target value 0 to 700 Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C TGT C C2 ARCDAT scrn C C color target VL 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the C patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed Use case When checking ARCDAT control operation Adj set operate method Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instru...

Page 576: ...sion Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Unit Appropriate target value 0 to 700 Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SUM A Y2 ARCDAT scrn A Y clr ctrl differ 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display Y patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range ex...

Page 577: ...Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SUM B Y2 ARCDAT scrn B Y clr ctrl differ 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display Y patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute auto gradation adjustment reset the target ...

Page 578: ...Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SUM C Y2 ARCDAT scrn C Y clr ctrl differ 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display Y patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute auto gradation adjustment reset the target ...

Page 579: ... 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C DLT A Y2 ARCDAT scrn A Y density differ 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the difference between Y patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute auto gradation adjustment reset the target ...

Page 580: ...Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C DLT B Y2 ARCDAT scrn B Y density differ 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the difference between Y patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute auto ...

Page 581: ...Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C DLT C Y2 ARCDAT scrn C Y density differ 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the difference between Y patch target value and the current value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute auto ...

Page 582: ...ction in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division Display adj set range 1023 to 1023 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SGL A Y2 ARCDAT scrnA Y patch current VL 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the current Y patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed When hue var...

Page 583: ...Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SGL B Y2 ARCDAT scrnB Y patch current VL 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the current Y patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer Use ...

Page 584: ...Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SGL C Y2 ARCDAT scrnC Y patch current VL 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the current Y patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer Use ...

Page 585: ...e mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SUM A Y3 ARCDAT scrnA Y clr ctrl differ 1 3 SPD Lv 2 Details To display Y patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1 3 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute auto gradation adjustment reset target value If not corrected check Patch Sensor or replace the developer Use cas...

Page 586: ...Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SUM B Y3 ARCDAT scrnB Y clr ctrl differ 1 3 SPD Lv 2 Details To display Y patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1 3 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute auto gradation adjustment reset target value...

Page 587: ...Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SUM C Y3 ARCDAT scrnC Y clr ctrl differ 1 3 SPD Lv 2 Details To display Y patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1 3 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute auto gradation adjustment reset target value...

Page 588: ...uired time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C DLT A Y3 ARCDAT scrn A Y density differ 1 3 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the difference between the Y patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1 3 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute auto gradation adjustment reset target value ...

Page 589: ...Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C DLT B Y3 ARCDAT scrn B Y density differ 1 3 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the difference between the Y patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1 3 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute a...

Page 590: ...Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C DLT C Y3 ARCDAT scrn C Y density differ 1 3 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the difference between the Y patch target value and the current value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1 3 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute a...

Page 591: ...action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division Display adj set range 1023 to 1023 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SGL A Y3 ARCDAT scrnA Y patch current VL 1 3 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the current Y patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1 3 speed When hue va...

Page 592: ...Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SGL B Y3 ARCDAT scrnB Y patch current VL 1 3 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the current Y patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1 3 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range check Patch Sensor or replace the developer Use case...

Page 593: ...Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER DISPLAY HT C SGL C Y3 ARCDAT scrnC Y patch current VL 1 3 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the current Y patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1 3 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range check Patch Sensor or replace the developer Use case...

Page 594: ...Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo SGL C K3 ARCDAT scrnC Bkpatch current VL 1 3 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the current Bk patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1 3 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range check Patch Sensor or replace the developer Use case When hue vari...

Page 595: ...10 0 22A 11 0 09A 4 M28 3 2 SL5 1 ON 1 SL6 1 ON 0 SL4 1 ON Address bit Name Mark Remarks P006 15 Third delivery flapper solenoid SL7 1 ON 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FM10 1 halfspeed 0 P007 15 Fixing heat exhaust fan 1 2 _half speed FM1 FM2 1 halfspeed 14 Fixing cooling fan front rear FM5 FM6 1 ON 13 Secondary transfer exhaust fan _full speed FM8 1 fullspeed 12 Secondary transfer exhaust fan ...

Page 596: ...R 0 LTR LGL EXE LTR R 2 PS31 1 HP 1 PS30 1 engage 0 PS19 0 DOOROPEN Address bit Name Mark Remarks P010 15 Delivery fan 2 _full speed FM9 1 fullspeed 14 Delivery fan 2 _half speed FM9 1 halfspeed 13 12 11 10 9 8 M26 1 ON 7 6 5 4 3 CL1 1 ON 2 1 Cassette 1 pickup motor_I1 M16 I1 I0 00 1 01A 01 0 79A 10 0 51A 11 0 09A 0 M16 P011 15 14 13 Cassette 2 pickup motor_I1 M17 I1 I0 00 1 01A 01 0 79A 10 0 51A ...

Page 597: ...cartridge fan rear _half speed FM4 0 halfspeed 12 11 Fixing motor_CW M21 0 CW1 CCW 10 9 Fixing motor_ON M21 8 7 6 0 OFF 5 1 OFF 4 FM4 0 fullspeed 3 First Second delivery motor_I1 M23 I1 I0 00 1 16A 01 0 89A 10 0 66A 11 0 09A 2 M23 1 0 P015 15 Third delivery motor_I1 M25 I1 I0 00 0 93A 01 0 74A 10 0 44A 11 0 09A 14 Third delivery motor_I0 M25 13 12 11 Reverse roller motor_I1 M24 I1 I0 00 0 72A 01 0...

Page 598: ...tect P017 15 Cassette 3 paper sensor PS2 0 paper 14 Cassette 3 paper level sensor A PS4 0 paper 13 Cassette 3 paper level sensor B PS5 0 paper 12 Cassette 3 pre registration sensor PS8 1 paper 11 Cassette 4 paper sensor PS3 0 paper 10 Cassette 4 paper level sensor A PS6 0 paper 9 PS7 0 paper 8 PS9 1 paper 7 PS1 0 DOOROPEN 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P018 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Cas...

Page 599: ...sensor PS49 0 paper 14 Cassette 1 paper level sensor A PS51 0 paper 13 Cassette 1 paper level sensor B PS52 0 paper 12 Cassette 1 pre registration sensor PS55 1 paper 11 Cassette 2 paper sensor PS50 0 paper 10 Cassette 2 paper level sensor A PS53 0 paper 9 PS54 0 paper 8 PS56 1 paper 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P022 15 ITB steering sensor PS24 1 ON 14 ITB displacement sensor 1 PS...

Page 600: ...8 1 HP 6 PS7 1 HP 5 PS6 1 HP 4 PS5 1 HP 3 TS4 1 toner 2 TS3 1 toner 1 TS2 1 toner 0 TS1 1 toner P025 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P026 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Primary transfer separation motor_I1 M15 I1 I0 00 1 06A 01 0 87A 10 0 69A 11 0 09A 6 M15 5 4 M15 0 CW1 CCW 3 ITB displacement control motor_I1 M14 I1 I0 00 0 74A 01 0 66A 10 0 24A 11 0 09A 2 M14 1 0 M14...

Page 601: ...ifter lower limit sensing switch SW2D 1 lowerlimit 11 Deck lifter upper limit sensor PS3D 1 upperlimit 10 Deck lifter position sensor PS4D 1 ON 9 PS1D 1 paper 8 7 PS9D 1 CLOSE 6 SW1D 0 CLOSE 5 PS7D 1 paper 4 PS2D 0 nopaper 3 PS6D 1 paper 2 PS5D 1 conect 1 0 T 8 14 Color Image Reader Unit RCON P001 to 005 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P001 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P002 15 14 13 12 11 1...

Page 602: ...or 2 SR3 0 OPEN1 CLOSE 1 DADF open closed sensor 1 SR1 0 OPEN1 CLOSE 0 Original size sensor 2 CF2 0 paper P004 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Scanner motor_I0 M1 I0 I1 0 0 100 0 1 75 1 0 50 1 1 25 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P005 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Scanner motor_derection M1 0 scan1 backscan 3 Fan drive FM2 1 ON 2 Scanner motor M1 1 enable 1 0 Scanner motor_I1 M1 T 8 15 ...

Page 603: ...n sensor 1 SR2 0 paper 4 Post separation sensor 2 SR3 0 paper 3 2 1 Original sensor SR1 1 paper 0 Cover open closed sensor SR10 0 OPEN Address bit Name Mark Remarks P003 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Original size sensor 1 SR17 1 paper 6 Original size sensor 2 SR18 1 paper 5 Original size sensor 3 SR19 1 paper 4 Original size sensor 4 SR20 1 paper 3 Disengaging home position sensor 1 SR15 1 HP 2 Leading...

Page 604: ... 7 Read motor M4 1 enable 6 Registration motor M3 1 enable 5 Feed motor M2 1 enable 4 Pickup motor_direction M1 0 nouse1 CW 3 Pickup roller unit lifter motor_direction M10 0 nouse1 CW 2 Read motor cooling fan FM2 1 ON 1 Glass shift motor_direction M9 0 HP1 0 Glass shift motor M9 1 enable Address bit Name Mark Remarks P007 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Delivery motor_direction M5 0 CW1 CCW 3 Delive...

Page 605: ... 10 9 8 7 Document width sensor2 SR13 1 paper 6 Document width sensor3 SR14 1 paper 5 Document width sensor4 SR15 1 paper 4 Delivery reversal sensor SR3 1 paper 3 Release motor HP sensor SR11 1 HP 2 1 Document length sensor 1 SR7 1 paper 0 Document length sensor 2 SR8 1 paper Address bit Name Mark Remarks P003 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Document set sensor SR5 0 papeer 2 Cover open closed sen...

Page 606: ...e 0 0 0 1 1 0 4 ADF motor_I1 M1 I0 I1 Ampere large 0 0 0 1 1 0 3 ADF motor M1 1 enable 2 ADF motor_direction M1 0 separate 1 pickup 1 0 T 8 17 Inner Finisher A1 SORTER P001 to P014 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P001 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Entrance sensor S1 0 ON1 OFF 6 Gripper unit HP sensor S7 0 ON1 OFF 5 4 3 2 1 0 P002 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Gripper unit move motor_CW M2 0 CW1 CCW 6 5 Paper le...

Page 607: ...14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Additional tray clock sensor S23 0 ON1 OFF 2 stack tray clock sensor S14 0 ON1 OFF 1 stapler move HP sensor S10 0 ON1 OFF 0 stapler HP sensor S18 0 ON1 OFF Address bit Name Mark Remarks P005 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 Entrance roller release stopper HP sensor S5 0 ON1 OFF 4 3 Shift roller release sensor S3 0 ON1 OFF 2 Shift roller HP sensor S2 0 ON1 OFF 1 0 P006 15 14...

Page 608: ...Additional tray paper sensor S22 0 ON1 OFF P008 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P009 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P010 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 stack tray paper sensor S15 0 nopaper1 paper 2 1 stack tray middle sensor S16 1 mid lowlevel 0 ...

Page 609: ...8 7 6 5 paper surface sensor2 S12 0 OFF1 ON 4 paper surface sensor1 S11 0 OFF1 ON 3 stapler edging sensor S19 0 OFF1 ON 2 stapler sensor S20 0 ON1 OFF 1 Gripper stapler connection sensor S9 0 OFF1 ON 0 Front cover switch SW1 0 OFF1 ON Address bit Name Mark Remarks P013 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P014 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 stapler motor M10 0 ENABLE1 DISABLE 6 5 4 Tray lift motor M11 0...

Page 610: ... Remarks P001 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Tray 2 paper surface sensor 2 PI120 0 paper1 nopaper 6 5 4 3 Front cover sensor PI102 0 CLOSE1 OPEN 2 1 0 P002 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P003 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P004 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ...

Page 611: ...12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P007 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Tray 1 shift motor_lock M107 0 OFF1 lock 2 1 0 Front cover sensor PI102 0 CLOSE1 OPEN P008 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Inlet sensor PI103 0 paper1 nopaper 3 Swing guide home position sensor PI105 1 HP 2 1 0 ...

Page 612: ... 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P011 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P012 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Swing height sensor PI123 0 CLOSE1 OPEN 6 Gear change home position sensor PI117 0 HP 5 Upper cover sensor PI101 0 CLOSE1 OPEN 4 Rear end assist guide home position sensor PI109 0 HP 3 Processing Tray sensor PI108 0 paper1 nopaper 2 Rear aligning plate home position sensor PI107 0 HP ...

Page 613: ...end assist motor_enable M109 0 standby1 enable 3 Rear end assist motor_enable_I1 M109 P014 3 P014 2 0 0 Low 0 1 MID 1 0 High 1 1 Max 2 Rear end assist motor_enable_I0 M109 1 Rear end assist motor_enable_CW M109 0 CW1 CCW 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P015 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 Stapler shift motor_enable M105 0 standby1 enable 4 3 2 Stack ejection motor_CW M102 0 CW1 CCW 1 Swing motor_amper...

Page 614: ...SL102 0 OFF1 ON 5 Shutter clutch CL101 0 OFF1 ON 4 Stack ejection lower roller clutch CL102 0 OFF1 ON 3 Buffer rear end holding solenoid SL104 0 OFF1 ON 2 1st delivery roller separation solenoid SL103 0 OFF1 ON 1 Stapler shift motor_I1 M105 P018 1 P018 0 0 0 Low 0 1 MID 1 0 High 1 1 Max 0 Stapler shift motor_I0 M105 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P019 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 Feed path sensor PI10...

Page 615: ...ensor PI14 1 HP P022 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Feed motor_CW M1 0 CCW1 CW Address bit Name Mark Remarks P023 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P024 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 No 2 paper deflecting solenoid SL2 0 OFF1 ON 4 No 1 paper deflecting solenoid SL1 0 OFF1 ON 3 Saddle inlet solenoid SL5 0 OFF1 ON 2 Paper folding home position sensor PI21 0 OFF1 ON 1 0 ...

Page 616: ... 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 Feed plate contact solenoid SL4 0 OFF1 ON 5 Paper folding motor_RV M2 0 OFF1 ON 4 3 2 Paper positioning plate paper sensor PI8 0 paper1 nopaper 1 Paper positioning plate home position sensor PI7 0 HP 0 Tray paper sensor PI6 0 paper1 nopaper P028 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Paper pushing plate motor_EN M8 0 ON1 OFF 6 Paper pushing plate motor_FWM M8 0 OFF1 ON 5 Paper pushing plate ...

Page 617: ...ront _CCW M7 0 ON1 OFF 2 Staple sensor front SW6 1 enable 1 0 P030 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P031 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Saddle inlet sensor PI22 0 nopaper1 paper 6 Guide home position sensor PI13 1 HP 5 Crescent roller phase sensor PI12 1 HP 4 Delivery sensor PI11 0 paper1 nopaper 3 Inlet cover sensor PI9 0 CLOSE1 OPEN 2 1 0 T 8 19 ...

Page 618: ...M63 P013 3 P013 2 0 0 Low 0 1 MID 1 0 High 1 1 Max 2 Punch feed motor_I0 M63 1 0 P032 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Punch HP sensor PI63 0 HP 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P033 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P034 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Punch motor_CW M61 0 ON 6 Punch motor_CCW M61 0 ON 5 LED PCB Rear edge direction PCB3 0 nopaper1 paper 4 Horizontal registration HP sensor PI61 1 HP...

Page 619: ...or_B M62 1 ON 1 Side registration motor_A M62 1 ON 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P039 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Side registration sensor1 PCB2 0 paper 6 Scrap full detector PCB PCB4 0 paper 5 Upper door switch MSW61 0 OPEN1 CLOSE 4 Front door switch MSW62 0 OPEN1 CLOSE 3 Side registration sensor2 PCB2 0 paper 2 Side registration sensor3 PCB3 0 paper 1 Side registration sensor4 PCB3 0 paper 0 T 8 2...

Page 620: ...image width is larger than the standard value set the smaller value When out of original area is copied set the larger value As the value is incremented by 1 the image position moves to the rear side by 0 1mm Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After th...

Page 621: ...educe Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit 0 01 Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related ...

Page 622: ... range 7500 to 9999 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 8735 Required time Related service mode COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT X W PLT Z BW TGT Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT Z White level data Z entry of white plate Lv 1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label When replacing the Copyboard Glass enter the value...

Page 623: ...alue Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR R Shading target value R Front side Lv 1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB enter the value of service label When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit paper front execute COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 DF WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the ser...

Page 624: ...setting horz scan Front Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 20 to 80 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 50 Re...

Page 625: ...lt value 50 Required time Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M8 MTF value 8 setting horz scan Front Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value...

Page 626: ...lt value 50 Required time Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 S5 MTF value 5 setting vert scan Front Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value...

Page 627: ...upplement memo COPIER ADJUST CCD 100DF2GB Img Sensr GB clr crrct VL bck D Reader Lv 2 Details To correct the color displacement G and B lines in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit paper back When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter t...

Page 628: ...propriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2B2 Complex chart No 2 data B Front side Lv 1 Details To derive the front back side linearity set the Blue data for paper front of No 2 image in DADF complex chart Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing ...

Page 629: ... Scanner Unit ppr frt rplce flag setting Lv 1 Details To set the calculation mode of MTF filter coefficient that is used at the replacement of Scanner Unit paper front When replacing the Scanner Unit paper front enter 1 When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use case When replacing the Scanner Unit paper front When replacing the Reader Controlle...

Page 630: ...lt value 50 Required time Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF M5 MTF value 5 setting horz scan Back Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value a...

Page 631: ...lt value 50 Required time Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S2 MTF value 2 setting vert scan Back Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value a...

Page 632: ... Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 20 to 80 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 50 Required time Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S8 MTF value...

Page 633: ... CCD DFCH R2 DFCH B2 DFCH B10 DFCH G2 DFCH G10 COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF LNR Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH B2 Complex chart No 2 data B Back side Lv 1 Details To derive the front back side linearity set the Blue data for paper back of No 2 image in DADF complex chart Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RA...

Page 634: ...alue 10 setting horz scan Front Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 20 to 85 Unit Appropriate target value Default val...

Page 635: ...fault value 50 Required time Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF M10 MTF value 10 setting horz scan Back Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting va...

Page 636: ...ing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 20 to 85 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 50 Required time Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2K2 Complex chart No 2 data B W Front Lv...

Page 637: ...d user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR BW Shading target value B W Front side Lv 1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB enter the value of service label When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit paper front execute COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL3 DF WLVL4 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PC...

Page 638: ... user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST CCD CCD CHG2 Scanner Unit paper back rplce flag set Lv 1 Details To set the calculation mode of MTF filter coefficient that is used at the replacement of Scanner Unit paper back When replacing the Scanner Unit paper back enter 1 When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use case When replacing the Scanner Un...

Page 639: ...et value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST IMG REG REG H K Adj Bk color write start pstn horz scan Lv 1 Details To adjust the write start position of black color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel Use case When black color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs Adj set operate method...

Page 640: ...dj set range 128 to 127 Unit 1 32 pixel Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST IMG REG REG V Y Adj Y color write start pstn vert scan Lv 1 Details To adjust the write start position of yellow color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel Use case When yellow color displacement in the vert...

Page 641: ...e Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST IMG REG REG V M Adj M color write start pstn vert scan Lv 1 Details To adjust the write start position of magenta color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel Use case When magenta color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs Adj set operate method Enter t...

Page 642: ...lue 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL C C toner dens value entry at initialize Lv 1 Details To enter the C toner density value of Patch Sensor Center at initialization Use case When checking the value before RAM clear and re enter it after RAM clear Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the ...

Page 643: ...ed service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL K Bk toner dens value entry at initialize Lv 1 Details To enter the Bk toner density value of Patch Sensor Center at initialization Use case When checking the value before RAM clear and re enter it after RAM clear Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Cauti...

Page 644: ...ure occurs due to environment change Adj set operate method Caution Do not use this at the normal service This is limited for the use of printer model Display adj set range 128 to 128 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST DENS P TG Y Adj of ATR control Y color target value Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset o...

Page 645: ...ated user mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST DENS P TG C Adj of ATR control C color target value Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for C When the target value determined upon initialization is changed the T D ratio is also changed Fogging and density increase are alleviated when the value is...

Page 646: ...he offset is reset when D max control Full Adjust is executed Use case When any image failure occurs due to environment change Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range 128 to 128 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Relate...

Page 647: ...sity Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 0 to 2047 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 1700 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST DENS REF K Bk toner density target value entry Lv 2 Details To enter the ATR Sensor Bk target value of ATR control after RAM clear Use case When checking the value before RAM clear and re enter it aft...

Page 648: ...ed user mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Quick Adjust Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST DENS DMLMT HK Bk toner charging DC voltage upper limit Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage upper limit for Bk in D max control Use case When a failure occurs due to limiter of D max control Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press...

Page 649: ...ser mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Quick Adjust Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST DENS DMLMT LK Bk toner charging DC voltage lower limit Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage lower limit for Bk in D max control Use case When a failure occurs due to limiter of D max control Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK ...

Page 650: ... label Use case When the backup data is cleared by RAM clear etc Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display adj set range 32 to 68 Unit 0 1 V Appropriate target value 32 to 68 Default value Required time Related service mode COPIER DISPLAY DENS CONT C Related user mode Suppleme...

Page 651: ...1 Unit 1 pixel Appropriate target value Default value 59 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK R Adjustment of right edge margin Lv 1 Details To adjust the margin on the right edge of paper As the value is incremented by 1 the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel 0 0847mm Use case When reducing the margin upon user s...

Page 652: ...adation Full Adjust Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Density Adjustment Mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST V CONT VCONT M Adj of M color contrast potential Lv 2 Details To adjust the contrast potential for M As the value is incremented by 1 the contrast potential changes by 10V Image becomes darker Image becomes lighter When the value is too large paper winds around the Fixing Roller or...

Page 653: ...on Full Adjust Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Density Adjustment Mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST V CONT VCONT K Adj of Bk color contrast potential Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the contrast potential Vcont for Bk As the value is incremented by 1 the contrast potential changes by 10V Image becomes darker Image becomes lighter When the value is too large paper winds around the...

Page 654: ... Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Correct Color Cast Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK M Adj M color fogging removal potential Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for M A value obtained by adding the adjustment value in Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Correct Color Cast to the fogging removal potentia...

Page 655: ...on Full Adjust Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Correct Color Cast Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK K Adj Bk color fogging removal potential Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Bk A value obtained by adding the adjustment value in Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Correct Color Cast to the fogging removal potential is set as t...

Page 656: ...me Related service mode COPIER ADJUST V CONT PT VCT Y PT VCT C PT VCT K Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST V CONT PT VCT C Adj of C color target contrast potential Lv 2 Details To adjust the C patch target contrast potential for D max PASCAL control As the value is incremented by 1 the target contrast potential changes by 1 V Potential is increased Potential is decreased Use case When...

Page 657: ... factory shipment Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST P C C density adj at test print reading Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset of C color test print reading signal at Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label As the greater value is set the image after adj...

Page 658: ...t range 8 to 8 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ C C color balance adjustment Lv 1 Details To adjust the default value of the color balance for C when the density of C varies between machines As the greater value is set the image gets darker If the value is too large a transfer failure and or a...

Page 659: ...ted service mode Related user mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Color Balance Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST COLOR OFST M Adj of M bright area dens color balance Lv 1 Details To adjust the bright area density and color balance of M As the greater value is set the image gets darker Lower the value when the background cannot be read correctly because the density of a document is dark a...

Page 660: ... cannot be read correctly because the density of a document is dark and increase the value when the density of a document is light Lower the value when removal of the background is not performed correctly and a fogging like image appears This setting is linked with Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Color Balance in user mode Use case When the background of a document cannot be read corre...

Page 661: ...ervice mode Related user mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Color Balance Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST COLOR LD OFS K Color balance adj of Bk low dens area Lv 2 Details To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk As the greater value is set the image gets darker This setting is linked with Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Color Balance Use case Do not use th...

Page 662: ...elated service mode Related user mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Color Balance Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD OFS K Color balance adj of Bk mid dens area Lv 2 Details To adjust the color balance of the intermediate density area of Bk As the greater value is set the image gets darker This setting is linked with Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Color Balance Use c...

Page 663: ...mage Quality Color Balance Use case Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 8 to 8 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Qu...

Page 664: ...priate target value 5 to 5 Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST HV PRI DIS TGC Dischg crrnt ctrl C tgt crrnt adj 1 1SPD Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the C target current at discharge current control in plain paper 1 1 speed Use case When a image failure sand like image occurs Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value swit...

Page 665: ...te target value 5 to 5 Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST HV PRI DIS TGC2 Dischg crrnt ctrl C tgt adj 1 2 1 3SPD Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the C target current at discharge current control in plain paper 1 2 1 3 speed Use case When a image failure sand like image occurs Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switc...

Page 666: ...Use case At the occurrence of an image density failure At the occurrence of a spotted image Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly If the value is too large the life of the Photosensitive Drum becomes shorter Display adj set range 10 to 10 Unit 50 Vpp Appropriate target value 5 to 5 Default value 0 Requir...

Page 667: ...rget value 5 to 5 Default value 0 Required time Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV PRI OFSTACM2 OFSTACC2 OFSTACK2 Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST HV PRI OFSTACM2 Adj of M clr charge AC current 1 2SPD Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset of the charge AC current for M at 1 2 speed As the value is incremented by 1 the offset is increased by 50 uA Increase the value when the density i...

Page 668: ...nted by 1 the offset is increased by 2 uA Increase the value if spotty mark or mottled image occurs Decrease the value if white spots occur Use case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit 1 uA Appropriate...

Page 669: ...tch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit 1 uA Appropriate target value 10 to 10 Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR N1 Sec trns ATVC tgt crrnt low hmdy pln 1st Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset value of target current for the 1st side of plai...

Page 670: ...opriate target value 20 to 20 Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR H1 Sec trns ATVC tgt crrnt low hmdy hvy 1st Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset value of target current for the 1st side of heavy paper at secondary transfer ATVC control in low humidity Use case When adjusting the secondary transfer bias according to the conditi...

Page 671: ...e 20 to 20 Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR N12 Sec trns ATVC crrnt norm hmdy pln 1st Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset value of target current for the 1st side of plain plain2 thin paper at secondary transfer ATVC control in normal humidity 600dpi Use case When adjusting the secondary transfer bias according to the condit...

Page 672: ...alue 20 to 20 Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR UH12 Sec trns ATVCcrrnt norm hmdy ext hvy 1st Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset value of target current for the 1st side of extra heavy paper at secondary transfer ATVC control in normal humidity Use case When adjusting the secondary transfer bias according to the conditions A...

Page 673: ...lue 20 to 20 Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR N13 Sec trns ATVC crrnt high hmdy pln 1st Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset value of target current for the 1st side of plain plain2 thin paper at secondary transfer ATVC control in high humidity 600dpi Use case When adjusting the secondary transfer bias according to the condit...

Page 674: ...alue 20 to 20 Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR UH13 Sec trns ATVCcrrnt high hmdy ext hvy 1st Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset value of target current for the 1st side of extra heavy paper at secondary transfer ATVC control in high humidity Use case When adjusting the secondary transfer bias according to the conditions Adj...

Page 675: ...2 uA Appropriate target value 20 to 20 Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR O1 Sec trns ATVC tgt crrnt low hmdy transp Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset value of target current for the transparency at secondary transfer ATVC control in low humidity Use case When adjusting the secondary transfer bias according to the conditions...

Page 676: ... control target current in B W mode As the value is incremented by 1 the offset changes by 1 uA If the value is too large fogging etc due to transfer memory occurs and if it is too small transfer failure etc occurs Use case When the image failure due to primary transfer occurs in B W mode Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute th...

Page 677: ...t value 0 Required time Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR N12 Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR T22 Sec trns ATVC crrnt norm hmdy thin 2nd Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset value of target current for the 2nd side of thin paper at secondary transfer ATVC control in normal humidity If the value is too large density loss due to excessive transfer or high voltage mo...

Page 678: ...priate target value 20 to 20 Default value 0 Required time Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR N1 Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR R2 Sec trns ATVC crrnt low hmdy rcycl 2nd Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset value of target current for the 2nd side of recycled paper at secondary transfer ATVC control in low humidity If the value is too large density loss due to exc...

Page 679: ...alue 0 Required time Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR N13 Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR R23 Sec trns ATVC crrnt high hmdy rcycl 2nd Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset value of target current for the 2nd side of recycled paper at secondary transfer ATVC control in high humidity If the value is too large density loss due to excessive transfer or high voltage mo...

Page 680: ...fault value 0 Required time Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR N22 Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR HN13 Sec trns ATVCcrrnt high hmdy hvy pln 1st Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset value of target current for the 1st side of relatively heavy plain paper at secondary transfer ATVC control in high humidity If the value is too large density loss due to excessive tran...

Page 681: ...alue 0 Required time Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR H2 Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR SH12 Sec trns ATVC crrnt norm hmdy hvy2 1st Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset value of target current for the 1st side of heavy2 paper at secondary transfer ATVC control in normal humidity If the value is too large density loss due to excessive transfer or high voltage mot...

Page 682: ...fault value 0 Required time Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR P1 Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR E2 Sec trns ATVC crrnt low hmdy envlp 2nd Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset value of target current for the 2nd side of envelope at secondary transfer ATVC control in low humidity If the value is too large density loss due to excessive transfer or high voltage mottl...

Page 683: ...lt value 0 Required time Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR P13 Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR E23 Sec trns ATVC crrnt high hmdy envlp 2nd Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset value of target current for the 2nd side of envelope at secondary transfer ATVC control in high humidity If the value is too large density loss due to excessive transfer or high voltage mott...

Page 684: ...ves upward Top margin becomes larger An image moves downward When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit 0 1 mm Ap...

Page 685: ...propriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C4 Cassette 4 write start pstn in horz scan Lv 1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 4 As the value is incremented by 1 the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0 1 m...

Page 686: ...arget value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C2RE Write start pstn in horz scan Cst2 2nd Lv 1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction for 2nd side when feeding paper from the Cassette 2 As the value is incremented by 1 the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0 1...

Page 687: ...positive by key and press OK key Caution Display adj set range 100 to 100 Unit 0 1 mm Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ MFRE Write start pstn in horz scan MPTray 2nd Lv 1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction for 2nd side when feeding paper from the...

Page 688: ...y Caution Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit 0 1 mm Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG DUP2 Rgst start timing adj Heavy 2nd side Lv 1 Details To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor when feeding the second side of heavy paper As the value is incremented b...

Page 689: ...nt changes by 0 5 mm Increase Decrease Use case Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit 0 5 mm Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG SPD Speed adjustment of Registration Motor Lv 1 Details To adjust 1 ...

Page 690: ...TION CST A6R Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data When registering a new value Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display adj set range 0 to 255 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related ...

Page 691: ...in power switch Caution Display adj set range 3 to 3 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS ADJ Set criteria for B W color in ACS front Lv 1 Details To set the judgment level of B W color original in ACS mode As the value is increased the original tends to be detected as a B W document and as the val...

Page 692: ... To set the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in ACS mode at DADF reading As the greater value is set the judgment area is widen Use case When adjusting the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in ACS mode at DADF reading Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Cau...

Page 693: ... Display adj set range 3 to 3 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS ADJ3 Set ACS B W color jdgmt stdrd back side Lv 1 Details To set the judgment level of B W color original in ACS mode back side at duplex reading with 1 path As the value is increased the original tends to be detected as a B W docum...

Page 694: ... be read in the copyboard reading mode Image on the first side of a document to be read in the reverse path duplex stream reading mode Image on the first side of a document to be read in the 1 path duplex stream reading mode As the greater value is set the image gets sharper If the value is too large moire is likely to occur in an output image of COPY and SEND To match the image quality with that ...

Page 695: ...ER ADJUST EXP LED PR EXP Y Setting of Y Pre exposure LED current Lv 2 Details To set the current of Y Pre exposure LED Increase the value when taking a measure for drum ghost Decrease the value when potential is not applied well Use case When drum ghost is significant drum pitch is not correct When potential is not applied well Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key...

Page 696: ...ropriate target value 10 to 15 Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo PR EXP K Setting of Bk Pre exposure LED current Lv 2 Details To set the current of Bk Pre exposure LED Increase the value when taking a measure for drum ghost Decrease the value when potential is not applied well Use case When drum ghost is significant drum pitch is not correct When ...

Page 697: ...s C5035 5030 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL STIR Y STIR C STIR K STIR 4 Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL STIR C Stirring of C color developer Lv 1 Details To stir developer in the C Developing Assembly Use case At installation of the machine At occurrence of an image failure Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Display adj set ...

Page 698: ... label Display adj set range At normal termination OK At abnormal termination NG Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Approx 10 seconds Related service mode COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY STRD POS Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD Card number setting Lv 1 Details To set the card number to be used for Card Reader A series of numbers from the entered number to...

Page 699: ... mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET M INISET C INISET K INISET 4 AINR OFF Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET M Exe of M Dev Ass y initial install mode Lv 1 Details To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the M Developing Assembly 1 Idle rotation of the Developing Assembly 2 Initialization of the Toner Density Sensor 3 Secondary transf...

Page 700: ...n of warm up rotation Warm up rotation can be omitted when turning OFF ON the power to check the image etc after the adjustment of warm up rotation etc This mode is executed when warm up rotation is not needed Use case At installation When replacing the Developing Assembly Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Be sure to ...

Page 701: ...vice counter failure and consumables etc to the sales company s server via SOAP protocol COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL COM LOG Dis connect error w Sales Co s server Lv 1 Details To display error information when the connection with the sales company s server failed Use case When using Embedded RDS Adj set operate method Display only Caution Be sure to use E RDS RGW PORT COM TEST COM LOG and RGW ADR as a...

Page 702: ...t range 1 to 168 1 week Unit 1 hour Appropriate target value Default value 24 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo Embedded RDS Function to send device information such as the device counter failure and consumables etc to the sales company s server via SOAP protocol COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET 4 All color Dev Ass y initial install mode Lv 1 Details To automatical...

Page 703: ...n installing the machine or replacing the Developing Assembly of other color do not use this item Execute this item after setting AINR OFF to 1 ON Display adj set range During operation xxx second remaining time At normal termination OK At abnormal termination NG Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time 155 seconds Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET Y INISET M INI...

Page 704: ...TAR G DFTAR B DFTAR2 R DFTAR2 G DFTAR2 B DFTAR BW DFTAR2BW DFTBK R DFTBK G DFTBK B Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF LNR Deriving of DADF front back linearity Lv 1 Details To derive the front back side linearity characteristics in the use of DADF based on the scanning data of the DADF complex chart No 2 No 10 Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM dat...

Page 705: ...n replacing the Copyboard Glass When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Set paper on the DADF 2 Select the item and then press OK key Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF WLVL3 Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required tim...

Page 706: ...Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION DPC DRM RSET DRMRSETM DRMRSETC DRMRSETK Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER FUNCTION DPC DRMRSETM Forcible exe of M Drum replacement mode Lv 1 Details When replacement of Drum Unit is completed within 30 minutes warm up rotation may not be executed at power off on because of high fixing temperature In such cases drum potential becomes unstable causing an i...

Page 707: ...d service mode COPIER FUNCTION DPC DRM RSET DRMRSETY DRMRSETM DRMRSETK Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER FUNCTION DPC DRMRSETK Forcible exe of Bk Drum replacement mode Lv 1 Details When replacement of Drum Unit is completed within 30 minutes warm up rotation may not be executed at power off on because of high fixing temperature In such cases drum potential becomes unstable causing an image ...

Page 708: ... MF A6R Use case Adj set operate method 1 Set A6R paper on the Multi purpose Tray and set the guide so that it fits the paper width 2 Select the item and then press OK key The value is registered after automatic adjustment Caution Display adj set range 0 to 255 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF A6R Related user mode Supplement...

Page 709: ...is the same at image formation It forms 4 toner bands which the 4 colors are laid on top of another on the ITB The base voltage Vb calculated with the Secondary Transfer ATVC control is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller until the toner bands pass through so that toner is adhered on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller After the toner bands passed Secondary Transfer Outer Roller cleanin...

Page 710: ...uired time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo T 8 39 FIXING COPIER FUNCTION FIXING NIP CHK Check of fixing nip width Lv 1 Details To check whether the fixing nip width is appropriate by printing If it is not appropriate a fixing failure may occur Use case When replacing the fixing related parts Fixing Film Pressure Roller When a fixing failure occurs Adj set operate method 1 Se...

Page 711: ...LED OFF End check of Control Panel LED Lv 1 Details To terminate checking of the LED on the Control Panel Use case During execution of LED CHK Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Display adj set range Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION PANEL LED CHK Related user mode Supplement memo KEY CHK Check of key en...

Page 712: ... 1 minute Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P MAIN DRV COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK CL Related user mode Supplement memo Remove the Inner Cover so that the Clutch can be checked visually COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK FAN Specification of operation Fan Lv 1 Details To specify the Fan to operate Use case When replacing the Fan checking the operation Adj set operate method Enter the value and then pre...

Page 713: ...efault value 1 Required time Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK MTR ON Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK MTR ON Operation check of Motor Lv 1 Details To start operation check of the Motor specified by MTR The operation automatically stops after operation of 5 seconds Use case When replacing the Motor checking the operation Adj set operate method Select the item ...

Page 714: ...3 E717 E719 Use case At error occurrence Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo DC CON RAM clear of DC Controller PCB Lv 1 Details To clear the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB Use case When clear...

Page 715: ...ppropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR PWD CLR Clear of system administrator password Lv 1 Details To clear the password of the system administrator set in the user mode Use case When clearing the password of the system administrator Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Display...

Page 716: ...de setting values by P PRINT After execution enter necessary setting values This item is executed for the data on the Main Controller PCB DC Controller PCB and Reader Controller PCB Display adj set range Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR MMI Clear of user mode setting...

Page 717: ...EY Deletion of CA certificate and key pair Lv 2 Details To simultaneously delete the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally registered by the user Use case When a service person replaces discards the device Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Check that OK is displayed 3 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Unless this item is executed at the time of r...

Page 718: ...r turning OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range At normal termination OK At abnormal termination NG Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR REG CLR Clear of image position correction value Lv 2 Details To clear the value when the correction value that is adjusted by image position correction...

Page 719: ...B A DADF 2 faces color differ crrct front Lv 1 Details To acquire scanning data on the front side in order to correct the color difference between the front and back side at the time of duplex stream reading A significant color difference may occur between the front and back side of the image scanned on DADF caused by variations in the light source of the lamp and changes in durability Such a colo...

Page 720: ...t the time of duplex stream reading The correction result is reflected after executing the following operation specify the reference side execute a series of color difference correction processing and then turn OFF ON the power Use case Before starting correction of color difference in DADF duplex printing Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Display adj set...

Page 721: ...cessary to readjust the MTF value by reading the MTF adjustment chart at installation When color copyboard reading is performed the controller performs sampling of the MTF value This value is set in COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 Mx MTF2 Sx Use case At installation Adj set operate method 1 Set the MTF chart on the copyboard glass 2 Select the item and then press OK key Caution Display adj set range During...

Page 722: ...COPIER FUNCTION MISC R CLM DF2 COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M1 to 12 MTF2 S1 to 12 Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER FUNCTION MISC R BWM DF1 Sampling of B W front stream read MTF VL Lv 1 Details The MTF value for the Reader Unit is sometimes displaced from the factory setting value depending on the condition at transportation storage If the machine is installed without correcting the value it may...

Page 723: ...e COPIER FUNCTION MISC R CLM DF1 COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF M1 to 12 MTF S1 to 12 Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER FUNCTION MISC R BWM DF2 Sampling B W back stream read MTF value Lv 1 Details The MTF value for the Reader Unit is sometimes displaced from the factory setting value depending on the condition at transportation storage If the machine is installed without correcting the value it may ...

Page 724: ...NCTION MISC R CLM PLTN CLM TGT COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M1 to 12 MTF2 S1 to 12 Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER FUNCTION MISC R BWPLT EN B W copyboard read MTF value initial set Lv 1 Details To return the MTF value for B W copyboard reading to the factory setting value Since overwriting is performed with the backup data retained in the Reader Controller PCB the MTF value obtained by sampling...

Page 725: ...UNCTION MISC R CLM DF1 CLM TGT COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M1 to 12 MTF2 S1 to 12 Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER FUNCTION MISC R BWDF1 EN B W front stream read MTF VL initial set Lv 1 Details To return the MTF value for B W front side stream reading to the factory setting value Since overwriting is performed with the backup data retained in the Reader Controller PCB the MTF value obtained by ...

Page 726: ... FUNCTION MISC R CLM DF2 CLM TGT COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF M1 to 12 MTF S1 to 12 Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER FUNCTION MISC R BWDF2 EN B W back stream read MTF VL initial set Lv 1 Details To return the MTF value for B W back side stream reading to the factory setting value Since overwriting is performed with the backup data retained in the Reader Controller PCB the MTF value obtained by sa...

Page 727: ...TN BWM DF1 BWM DF2 becomes 55 or lower of the value When 1 is specified the MTF correction filter is calculated again and the MTF value becomes 50 or lower of the value the image becomes foggy The backed up MTF filter correction coefficient is updated Use case When decreasing the MTF value to make the image foggy upon user s request moire incorrect judgment Adj set operate method Enter the setting...

Page 728: ...efault value Required time Approx 45 seconds Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P AT IMG X Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER FUNCTION MISC P KEY HIST Output of Ctrl Panel key entry history Lv 1 Details To print the key input history on the Control Panel Use case When printing the key input history on the Control Panel Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Cauti...

Page 729: ... Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Approx 45 seconds Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER FUNCTION MISC P ENV PRT Inside temp hmdy fix roller temp log Lv 1 Details To print the data of temperature and humidity in the machine temperature of the surface of the Fixing Roller as logs Use case When grasping information of temperature in the machine fixin...

Page 730: ...nt is executed by AUTO IMG Use case When removing the Drum Unit When releasing the ITB pressure Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Approx 95 seconds Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P AUTO IMG Related user mode Supple...

Page 731: ...e Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM HD CLEAR HD CHECK Related user mode Supplement memo Universal file Management information of user setting data various log data PDL spool data and image data etc COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM HD CHECK Entire HDD check and recovery Lv 1 Details To check the entire HDD and execute recovery processing Use case Adj set operate method Select the item and then pres...

Page 732: ...HDD Lv 2 Details To print the PLOG saved in HDD by COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DEBUG 1 A4 Approx 20 sheets SUBLOG is not printed It should be uploaded from SST Use case When printing PLOG Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Unit Appropriate target valu...

Page 733: ...e method Select the item and then press OK key Caution During operation the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment When backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored it is overwritten by the old setting data and the new data is deleted Display adj set range Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM ...

Page 734: ...d paper size When the paper size is larger than the original size selecting ON reduces productivity because the scanning area gets larger Use case When matching the scanning area with the paper size Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF calculated from the detected original size 1 ON cal...

Page 735: ...priate target value Default value Required time Related service mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW MODEL SZ Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION FNC SW W SCNR Setting of Reader Unit installation Lv 1 Details To set installation of the Reader Unit 1 installed is automatically selected once the Reader Unit is detected at the start of the machine Use case When installing removing the Reader Unit Ad...

Page 736: ...A LTR R 3 EXECUTIVE R Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION FNC SW ORG LDR Spcl ppr size set in DADF LDR Reader Lv 2 Details To set the size of special paper LDR configuration that cannot be recognized in DADF stream reading mode Use case Upon user s request When picking up special paper size original from D...

Page 737: ...elated user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION FNC SW INTROT T Set of auto adjustment standby interval Lv 1 Details To set the continuous standby time until execution of auto adjustment When the standby condition continues more than the specified time the Photosensitive Drum starts idle rotation for 30 seconds As the value is incremented by 1 the time gets 1 hour longer The auto adjustment during ...

Page 738: ...SW FXWRNLVL Set Fixing Film life display thresholdVL Lv 2 Details To set the threshold value to display the life of Fixing Film This item is enabled when the value at the following is set to 1 default 0 COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW FXMSG SW ON OFF of Fixing Assembly replacement message The life judgment counter is stored in the DC Controller It is not possible to change or check the counter value Use ca...

Page 739: ...ice mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION FNC SW PDF RDCT PDF reduction set at forwarding Lv 2 Details To set whether to reduce the image for transmission when converting the image received by IFAX into PDF for e mail file transmission Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Displ...

Page 740: ...on Settings Send Common Settings Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX Supplement memo WebDAV function is equipped as standard with the machine COPIER OPTION FNC SW CARD RNG Card number setting department number Lv 2 Details To set the number of cards departments that can be used with the Card Reader Use case When setting the number of cards departments Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting va...

Page 741: ...ept in the log Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo Scan job A job after the scanning operation is completed COPIER OPTION FNC SW PT W SET Set toner band width at ini rotn transp Lv 2 Details To set the toner band width that is created on the ITB at the initial rotation w...

Page 742: ...Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Automatic setting when the print server is not connected no support When the print server is connected supported 1 Not supported Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo A job that requires finishing such as stapling in one job Does not apply in the cas...

Page 743: ...lled when installing the RAID Board Select 0 Not installed when removing the RAID Board Use case When installing removing RAID Board Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Not installed 1 Installed Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user m...

Page 744: ...ce When 1 is set favorites in the browser for service can be edited and any URLs can be accessed Use case When service engineers edit favorites in the browser for service Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Rela...

Page 745: ...e main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Not installed 1 Installed Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION FNC SW INVALPDL Disable of PDL license Lv 1 Details To disable the registered PDL license When 1 Disabled is set PDL is disabled even if a PDL license is registered This is set to the ma...

Page 746: ... Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo CDS Contents Delivery System COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS UGW Set to allow firmware update from UGW Lv 1 Details To set whether to permit update of the firmware from the UGW server When 1 Enabled is set Updater accepts the operation from the UGW server in cooperation with CDS Use case When allowing update of the firmware from the UG...

Page 747: ...ey 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Half speed 1 Full speed Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo T 8 47 DSPLY SW COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI COPY Display hide of copy screen Lv 2 Details To set whether to display or hide the copy function Use case Upon user s request Adj set operat...

Page 748: ...n the threshold a warning message of The toner container can be replaced continuous print is available is displayed on the Control Panel When the value is incremented by 1 the threshold is increased by 20 As the smaller value is set the message timing to be displayed becomes earlier Use case Upon user s request At the timing that the service engineer visits to the customer etc Adj set operate meth...

Page 749: ...mo COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW FXMSG SW ON OFF of Fixing Assembly replace mssg Lv 2 Details To set whether to display the message prompting the replacement of Fixing Assembly on the Control Panel when the life judgment counter reaches the specified value When 1 default 0 is set in FXMSG SW and also 1 default 0 is set in COPIER OPTION FNC SW FXWRNLVL the life of Fixing Assembly is detected When the Fixi...

Page 750: ...o display of warning screen Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW MEAP DSP Related user mode Supplement memo If just disabling the switch with MEAP DSP the screen is switched to the standard screen in the case of an error jam alarm If disabling the switch with ANIM SW the screen will not be switched to the standard screen and a warn...

Page 751: ...lt value 1 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI WEB Display hide of Web browser screen Lv 2 Details To set whether to display or hide the Web browser screen Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Dis...

Page 752: ...e 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Europe 1 Other than Europe Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI MEM ON OFF of memory media screen display Lv 2 Details To set ON OFF of the memory media screen display on the Control Panel Use case When not displaying the memory media screen on the Control Panel Adj set opera...

Page 753: ...djust Action Color Black Priority for First Print Time Supplement memo T 8 48 NETWORK COPIER OPTION NETWORK RAW DATA Setting of received data print mode Lv 2 Details To set print mode for the received image data This item is used to identify the cause whether it s due to image data or image processing in the case of trouble with received image Use case When received image trouble occurs Adj set op...

Page 754: ...ropriate target value Default value 25 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION NETWORK SMTPRXPN Setting of SMTP reception port number Lv 2 Details To set SMTP reception port number Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 65535...

Page 755: ...pplication such as COPY SEND BOX etc Canon s own protocol COPIER OPTION NETWORK NS CMD5 Limit CRAM MD5 auth method at SMTP auth Lv 2 Details To restrict use of CRAM MD5 authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0...

Page 756: ...the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e mail transmission only when it s authenticated COPIER OPTION NETWORK NS PLN Limit plain txt auth at SMTPauth noencry Lv 2 Details To restrict use of PLAIN LOGIN authentication which is plain text at the time of SMTP authentication under the environment where the communication packet is not encrypted Use case Upon user s request Adj set...

Page 757: ...PTION NETWORK STS PORT CMD PORT DA PORT Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON When installed Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo DA Digital Accessory COPIER OPTION NETWORK DA CNCT Connection setting of WPGW Lv 2 Details To set WPGW connection Use case This mode is used for the Japanese models only and not used with ov...

Page 758: ...y 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 1 to 65535 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 515 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo LPD port Network port for TCP IP communication when making prints through network COPIER OPTION NETWORK WUEV SW Setting of sleep notification execution Lv 2 Details To set whether to notify the sleep mode...

Page 759: ...mode COPIER OPTION NETWORK WUEV SW Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION NETWORK WUEN LIV Recovery time setting after sleep notice Lv 2 Details To set the time from the sleep start from network without job assignment until the mode is shifted to the sleep mode Use case When setting the startup time after sleep notification Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press O...

Page 760: ...en the characters in the text is less than the number of specified characters This machine can output blank paper because some senders send e mail text consists of linefeed codes only In such case specify 2 number of characters so that there will be no output of blank paper In the case of specifying any number other than 0 header footer is printed forwarded in 1 sheet only if the e mail body text ...

Page 761: ...ETWORK WOLTRANS Setting of sleep recovery protocol Lv 1 Details To set the protocol for recovery from sleep mode according to the value of WOL Wake On LAN trans Reception of a specific network packet is one of the requirements for the device to recover from sleep mode When the number of network protocols supported by the device increases the types of network packets which activate recovery from sl...

Page 762: ...D value is managed when IPSec Board is used Normally SRAM needs to be cleared in the case of mismatch in SPD value COPIER OPTION NETWORK NCONF SW ON OFF of Network Configurator function Lv 1 Details To set ON OFF of Network Configurator function If the user does not use the function select OFF to prevent remote attack through network Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the ...

Page 763: ...Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 65535 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 20317 Required time Related service mode COPIER OPTION NETWORK AFC JOB AFC EVNT Related user mode Supplement memo AFC JOB Set of FAX client job sending port Lv 1 Details To set the port of a fax client from which jobs are sent to the...

Page 764: ...riate target value Default value 1 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION NETWORK IPTBROAD Set to allow broad multi cast TX Lv 1 Details To set whether to permit transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets Transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets is permitted without specifying an exception address It is permitted within the de...

Page 765: ...and humidity inside the machine and the surface temperature of the Fixing Film As the value is incremented by 1 the cycle is increased by 1 minute Obtained log can be displayed by selecting the following COPIER DISPLAY ENVRNT Use case At trouble analysis Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 480...

Page 766: ...the downtime and the toner consumption can be reduced however image failure may occur Use case When an image failure occurs due to lowering of the transfer efficiency Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 15 to 15 Unit Number of sheets Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related se...

Page 767: ... feed the envelope in 1 2 speed or 1 1 speed Use case When the glued part of envelope adheres to the Fixing Film Pressure Roller Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 1 2 speed 1 1 1 speed Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supp...

Page 768: ...1 the temperature is increased by 5 deg C from the initial setting value The temperature is detected by the Sub Thermistor 1 and 2 Use case When improving the hot offset and the productivity at the paper edge Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 d...

Page 769: ...t With dust detection correction control the image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected COPIER OPTION IMG RDR DFDST L2 DADF mode dust dtct level adj after job Lv 1 Details To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed after the job is completed in DADF mode Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the ...

Page 770: ...ust detection correction control the image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected COPIER OPTION IMG RDR DF2DSTL2 Adj DADF dust dtct level at job end bck Lv 1 Details To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed by the Scanner Unit paper back after the job is completed in DADF mode Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of clean...

Page 771: ...tout Mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION IMG MCON TMC SLCT Setting of error diffusion coefficient Lv 2 Details To set coefficient to be used for error diffusion process Specify according to the level of granularity and dot stability Use case Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 Small granularity lo...

Page 772: ...ustment of Bk_LUT for PDL and for copy which are used by TMIC When the trailing edge adjustment is set to ON the density of the high density area becomes high and consequently text and thin lines become clear While an image becomes clear the hue of the gradation area of photos etc is changed Use case When thin lines are partly missing or characters are faded Adj set operate method 1 Enter the sett...

Page 773: ...Equivalent to PDL photo mode Black text is reproduced with 4 colors Screen processed image 2 Equivalent to scanned text mode Black text is reproduced with black plain color Error diffused image The hue of the photo area might be different from 0 3 Equivalent to scanned photo mode Black text is reproduced with black plain color Screen processed image Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Re...

Page 774: ...ue 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION IMG MCON BMLNKS Z Set BMLinkS reception print img process Lv 1 Details To set the image processing which is performed when printing received BMLinkS Use case When there is a request for image improvement Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch C...

Page 775: ...unt is not limited Unit Appropriate target value Default value 1 Required time Related service mode COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW IMGC ADJ Related user mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Density Adjustment Mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION IMG MCON VP ART Setting of line art processing Lv 2 Details To make a setting for outline processing for line art on scalable PDF In the outline process...

Page 776: ...ower switch Caution Do not change the setting in the normal operation Display adj set range 1 to 3 1 CS 814 Except for USA and EU Mainly for Japan 2 Hammermill For USA 3 Mondi For EU Unit Appropriate target value Default value The value differs according to the location Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION IMG MCON P ALPHA Adjustment of Patch Sensor al...

Page 777: ...ithering Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode COPIER TEST PG TXPH Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION IMG MCON ERS SEL1 Set 1200 dpi ERS process PS Expnsn Kit Lv 1 Details To change the ERS processing when the hue of patterned graphics is changed according to phase in the case of making 1200 dpi output with the PS Expansion Kit installed The ...

Page 778: ...the specified value ARCDAT control is executed by interrupting an ongoing job If the value is too large the density of image becomes different before and after the interruption If the value is too small the productivity is lowered Actual setting value is calculated by dividing the entry value by 0 9 and rounding up after the decimal points e g If an entry value is 100 setting value will be 112 Use...

Page 779: ...Lv 2 Details To actually correct the T D ratio by setting the offset to the gain value of ATR Sensor Bk As the value is increased increasing the T D ratio the screw pitch unevenness is alleviated however fogging may occur If the value is changed the target value for T D ratio is also changed so that the toner ejection sequence needs to be forcibly executed to stabilize the T D ratio The value retu...

Page 780: ...changed execute the toner ejection sequence Display adj set range 3 to 3 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DEVL PTH Set sheet threshold VL of toner ejection Lv 1 Details To set the threshold value for the number of sheets which is the condition to perform the low duty toner ejection sequence As t...

Page 781: ...tion exe image ratio Lv 2 Details To set the threshold value of average image ratio to execute Y toner ejection As the value is incremented by 1 the ratio is increased by 1 Increase the value when fogging occurs at a large volume printing of low duty image Decrease the value when users care about the amount of waste toner compared to the low duty image output Use case Adj set operate method 1 Ente...

Page 782: ...equired time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION IMG DEV ADJ VPP Adj of developing AC bias Vpp Lv 2 Details To adjust Vpp of the developing AC bias Ring marks are alleviated when the value is decreased in the direction and white spots are alleviated when the value is increased in the direction Use case When image failures ring marks white spots occur Adj set operat...

Page 783: ...ult value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo T 8 57 IMG TR COPIER OPTION IMG TR 2TR RVON ON OFF end edge white spot crrct scrn Lv 2 Details To set whether to display the screen to set ON OFF of the paper trailing edge weak bias in user mode When 1 is set trailing edge white spot correction screen is displayed in user mode If ON is set in this screen weak bias is...

Page 784: ... the Photosensitive Drum at standby or sleep mode When a device is left for a long period of time a drum pitch line occurs To prevent this rotate the Photosensitive Drum at the specified interval for 300 msec only As the value is incremented by 1 the interval is extended by 5 minutes If users do not care about the drum pitch line or they want to reduce the rotation interval increase the value Use ...

Page 785: ...C Unit 5 deg C Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TBL5 Setting of fixing control temp thin ppr Lv 1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for thin paper 52 to 63 g m2 As the value is increased by 1 the control temperature is increased by 5 deg C Increase the value when the fixing ...

Page 786: ...t 5 deg C Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TMP4 Setting of ITOP control temp heavy 3 Lv 1 Details To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for heavy paper 3 210 to 256 g m2 As the value is incremented by 1 the control temperature is increased by 5 deg C Use case When uneven gloss occurs in t...

Page 787: ...riate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXST2 UH Set heavy ppr ITOP standby time LL ev Lv 1 Details To set the time for initial rotation when feeding the heavy paper 1 2 3 in 18 deg C or lower temperature Increase the value when the fixing failure occurs Use case When a fixing failure occurs in LL environment Adj...

Page 788: ...uired time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TBL8 Fixing control temperature set transp Lv 1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for transparency As the value is incremented by 1 the control temperature is increased by 5 deg C Increase the value when fixing failure occurs Decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use case When o...

Page 789: ...ting is done Display adj set range 3 to 3 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION IMG FIX DMX OF K Adjustment of Bk color D max setting Lv 2 Details When adjusting D max control setting in case that density of solid area on black color image is not appropriate even performing auto gradation adjustment Increase...

Page 790: ...deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit 5 deg C Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TMP8 Setting of ITOP control temp transp Lv 1 Details To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for transparency As the value is incremented by 1 the control temperature is increased by 5 deg C Use case When uneven gloss...

Page 791: ...t value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo T 8 59 CUSTOM COPIER OPTION CUSTOM TEMP TBL Fixing control temperature setting pln1 Lv 1 Details To set the fixing control temperature for plain paper 1 64 to 81 g m2 As the value is incremented by 1 the control temperature is increased by 5 deg C Increase the value when fixing failure occurs Decrease the ...

Page 792: ...ed time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo ABK TOOL Allow access from address book mntc tool Lv 1 Details To set whether to accept import from the address book maintenance tool Use case When executing import from the address book maintenance tool Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set ra...

Page 793: ...et in the user mode Preferences Timer Energy Settings Auto Sleep Time COPIER OPTION USER SIZE DET ON OFF of original size detect function Lv 2 Details To set ON OFF of original size detection function Use case Upon user s request glare of the scan lamp etc Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1...

Page 794: ...ue Default value The value differs according to the location Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER4 Setting of software counter 4 Lv 1 Details To set counter type for software counter 4 on the Counter Check screen Use case Upon user dealer s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the mai...

Page 795: ...MMYY 2 MM DD YY Unit Appropriate target value Default value The value differs according to the location Required time Related service mode Related user mode Preferences Timer Energy Settings Date Time Settings Supplement memo COPIER OPTION USER MB CCV Control card usage limit for Mail Box Lv 2 Details To restrict use of control card for Mail Box Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method ...

Page 796: ...10 Remote copy mono color large 011 Remote copy mono color small 012 Remote copy black and white large 013 Remote copy black and white small 014 Remote copy full color mono color large 015 Remote copy full color mono color small 016 Remote copy full color mono color 2 017 Remote copy full color mono color 1 018 Remote copy full color large double sided 019 Remote copy full color small double sided...

Page 797: ...al B large 153 Total B small 154 Total B full color 1 155 Total B full color 2 156 Total B black and white 1 157 Total B black and white 2 No Counter Details 158 Total B mono color large 159 Total B mono color small 160 Total B black and white large 161 Total B black and white small 162 Total B1 double sided 163 Total B2 double sided 164 largeB double sided 165 smallB double sided 166 Total B mono...

Page 798: ...e 282 Local copy mono color small 283 Local copy black and white large 284 Local copy black and white small 285 Local copy full color mono color large 286 Local copy full color mono color small No Counter Details 287 Local copy full color mono color 2 288 Local copy full color mono color 1 289 Local copy full color large double sided 290 Local copy full color small double sided 291 Local copy mono...

Page 799: ...al 1 602 Box print Total 2 No Counter Details 603 Box print large 604 Box print small 605 Box print full color 1 606 Box print full color 2 607 Box print mono color 1 608 Box print mono color 2 609 Box print black and white 1 610 Box print black and white 2 611 Box print full color large 612 Box print full color small 613 Box print mono color large 614 Box print mono color small 615 Box print blac...

Page 800: ... 769 Mobile Print black and white large 770 Mobile Print black and white small 771 Mobile Print full color large double sided 772 Mobile Print full color small double sided 773 Mobile Print black and white large double sided 774 Mobile Print black and white small double sided 801 Report print Total 1 802 Report print Total 2 No Counter Details 803 Report print large 804 Report print small 805 Repo...

Page 801: ...vice mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION USER MF LG ST Dis hide of long strip mode Lv 2 Details To set whether to display or hide the Long Original button When 1 is set Long Original button is displayed in Copy Options screen and the long strip paper becomes available Use case Upon user s request use of long strip original or long strip paper Adj set operate method 1 Enter the set...

Page 802: ...rate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 1 to 4 1 1 time deletion with 0 data 2 1 time deletion with random data 3 3 time deletion with random data 4 DOD Unit Appropriate target value Default value 1 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo HDD data complete deletion function a function...

Page 803: ...red time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION USER IDPRN SW Charge target job set of dept mngm cntr Lv 1 Details To set the job type that advances the department management counter Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 PRINT catego...

Page 804: ...gure while the value of COPIES command for the next page or later is invalid Same control applies as Canon made PCL at the time of Non Sorted mode 2 to 65535 For future use Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION USER CNT SW Set default dis items on charge counter Lv 1 Details To set default display items of t...

Page 805: ... mode Supplement memo Charging management device Coin manager Non Canon made control card COPIER OPTION USER DFLT CPY Setting of color mode for copy Lv 1 Details To set the default color mode for copy operation Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 2 0 Based on Auto ...

Page 806: ...vice mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION USER RUI RJT Connct set at invalid auth from remoteUI Lv 2 Details To set to disconnect HTTP port when the machine receives invalid authentication from remote UI 3 times Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1...

Page 807: ... does not go through the server With the setting to restrict the data size there will be 830 error in the case of sending data that exceeds the upper limit value In the case that the data goes through the server the size of transmission data is always restricted Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch C...

Page 808: ...ays to which paper can be output 1 All trays which are specified as the dedicated trays Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION USER PRNT POS ON OFF of all pauses at error job cancel Lv 2 Details To set whether to pause the print operation of following jobs when a job is cancelled due to an error inside the ma...

Page 809: ...ork because it does not move to sleep mode 1 For this machine to recover from sleep mode 1 through network a particular packet needs to be received however the existing network related application does not send this packet With the setting not to use the network related application this machine cannot recover from sleep mode 1 through network when it gets into sleep mode 1 Use case Upon user s req...

Page 810: ...tware counter 7 on the Counter Check screen Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 999 0 Not registered Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER8 Setting of software c...

Page 811: ...abled follow the setting to execute operation to restrict specification Use case Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Changing this mode is not available in Service Mode but reference is available in Service mode This mode is available only with the MEAP program that supports job archive Display adj set range 0 OFF 1 ON ...

Page 812: ...try at the time of file transmission File transmission is not available by entering the address because of no display of File on the transmission screen The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution To restrict addresses for transmission...

Page 813: ...value 0 Required time Related service mode COPIER OPTION USER LDAP SW Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION USER JA DPI Dis of job archive record resolution Lv 2 Details To display the resolution of images for job archives recorded in jobs other than FAX reception and IFAX reception etc Only display is available in service mode The setting is available only in the MEAP applications which...

Page 814: ...value Countries other than USA 0 USA 1 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION USER CLR TIM Set of HDD Encry Kit data delete timing Lv 2 Details To set the timing to completely delete the data when HDD Encryption Kit is used Selecting 0 may reduce the job processing speed because page data that has been already processed is deleted while the other job is ...

Page 815: ...witch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 2 0 OFF 1 Read only 2 Read Write Unit Appropriate target value Default value 2 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Preferences Network SNMP Settings Community Name 1 Settings Supplement memo COPIER OPTION USER SNMP COU Inside comty name SNMP access limit user Lv 2 Details To restrict SNMP access by the community name user right that is kept...

Page 816: ...play Preferences External Interface USB Settings Use USB Host By selecting 1 Display whether to use USB host on USB setting screen can be selected Use case When switching to display or hide Use USB Host on USB setting screen Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Unit Appropria...

Page 817: ...lt value 1 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION USER USBB DSP Dis hide of USB Bluetooth device driver Lv 2 Details To set whether to display Preferences External Interface USB Settings Use MEAP Driver for Bluetooth Device When 0 Hide is set this item is not displayed and the user administrator cannot change the setting of the MEAP driver for the USB Bl...

Page 818: ... size groupU1 Lv 2 Details To set whether to display or hide paper name at paper size group U1 detection Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supple...

Page 819: ... value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION CST ENV1 Setting of Envelope Cassette ENV1 size Lv 1 Details To set the size for Envelope Cassette ENV1 Use case When specifying the size for Envelope Cassette Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 21 to 26 21...

Page 820: ...me Related service mode Related user mode Preferences Paper Settings A5R STMTR Paper Selection Supplement memo COPIER OPTION CST CST2 P2 Setting of Cassette 2 paper size Lv 1 Details To set the paper size used in Cassette 2 Use case Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 B5 1 EXEC Unit Approp...

Page 821: ...EC Paper Selection Supplement memo COPIER OPTION CST CST1 U1 Set cst 1 oversea special ppr category 1 Lv 1 Details To set the overseas special paper category 1 used in Cassette 1 Use case Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 43 0 A4 R LTR R 1to 23 Not used 24 FLSC 25 A FLS 36 Not used 27 E OFI ...

Page 822: ...ated user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION CST CST2 U1 Set cst 2 oversea special ppr category 1 Lv 1 Details To set the overseas special paper category 1 used in Cassette 2 Use case Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 43 0 A4 R LTR R 1to 23 Not used 24 FLSC 25 A FLS 36 Not used 27 E OFI 28 t...

Page 823: ...ated user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION CST CST3 U1 Set cst 3 oversea special ppr category 1 Lv 1 Details To set the overseas special paper category 1 used in Cassette 3 Use case Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 43 0 A4 R LTR R 1to 23 Not used 24 FLSC 25 A FLS 36 Not used 27 E OFI 28 t...

Page 824: ...ated user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION CST CST4 U1 Set cst4 overseas special ppr category 1 Lv 1 Details To set the overseas special paper category 1 used in Cassette 4 Use case Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 43 0 A4 R LTR R 1to 23 Not used 24 FLSC 25 A FLS 36 Not used 27 E OFI 28 t...

Page 825: ...0 to 2 is changed to 3 the following items are automatically set After making a change even though 3 is set to 0 to 2 again they will not be restored COPIER OPTION USER CONTROL AFN PSWD 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW DA CNCT 1 COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI BOX UI SEND UI FAX UI EXT 0 IE Settings IE Function Priority ON Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings IP Address Range Settings RX Print Range ...

Page 826: ...Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 3 0 Coin 1 Card 2 Coin and card 3 Card for customization Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION ACC STPL LMT Set Number of sheets for saddle stitch Lv 2 Details To set ...

Page 827: ... limit number of sheets With priority on the upper limit number of sheets processing performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup location Display adj set range 0 to 2 0 No support 1 Priority on speed 2 Priority on upper limit number of sheets Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION ACC U...

Page 828: ...r switch Caution As the smaller value is set the number of prints to be made without charging is decreased but the productivity might be lowered Display adj set range 2 to 10 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 6 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo DA Digital Accessory COPIER OPTION ACC MIN PRC Set of Coin Manager minimum price Lv 1 Details To set the minim...

Page 829: ...the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 255 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 128 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings Tune Microphone Supplement memo COPIER OPTION ACC SRL SPSW Setting of Serial I F Kit support Lv 1 Details To set the support level of the Serial Interface Kit To keep processing performa...

Page 830: ...e specified account only 1 Permits 2 Permits the specified department ID only Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION INT FACE AP ACCNT Job dept ID set of appli w print server Lv 2 Details To set department ID to the print job from the application PrintMe equipped with print server Use case Upon user s request...

Page 831: ...43 ColorPASS GX300 444 imagePASS B1 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 1 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo T 8 67 LCNS TR COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST SEND Install state dis of SEND function Lv 2 Details To display installation state of SEND function when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether SEND function is installed Adj set operate method 1 ...

Page 832: ...it Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST SPDF Instal state dis of SEND searchbl PDF TX Lv 2 Details To display installation state of transmission function for SEND searchable PDF when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether transmission function for SEND searchable PDF is installed Adj set op...

Page 833: ...nge 24 digits Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo PDF Expansion Kit Encryption PDF Searchable PDF COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST PDFDR Install state dis of PDF direct print Lv 2 Details To display installation state of PDF direct print function when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether PDF direct print function i...

Page 834: ...Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST HDCLR Install state dis of HDD encry delete Lv 2 Details To display installation state of HDD encryption data complete deletion function when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether HDD encryption data complete deletion function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST HDC...

Page 835: ...ppropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST VNC Installation state display of VNC Lv 2 Details To display installation state of VNC function when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether VNC function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST VNC 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation...

Page 836: ... value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST HRPDF Install state dis of high compress PDF Lv 2 Details To display installation state of high compression PDF function when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether high compression PDF function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST HRPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When ...

Page 837: ...riate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST WTMRK Install state dis of watermark function Lv 2 Details To display installation state of watermark print function when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether watermark print function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST WTMRK 2 Enter 0 and then p...

Page 838: ...iate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST USPDF Install state dis of PDF TX w user sign Lv 2 Details To display installation state of PDF transmission function with user signature when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether PDF transmission function with user signature is installed Adj set operate meth...

Page 839: ...ange 24 digits Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST SCPDF Instal state dis of scalable PDF TX func Lv 2 Details To display installation state of scalable PDF transmission function when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether scalable PDF transmission function is installed Adj set operat...

Page 840: ...DS 3rd pty expnsn Lv 2 Details To display installation state of third party expansion function of E RDS when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether third party expansion function of E RDS is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST ERDS 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR ERDS Caution Display adj set r...

Page 841: ...opriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST PCL Install state display of PCL function Lv 2 Details To display installation state of PCL function when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether PCL function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST PCL 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installatio...

Page 842: ...Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST LIPS5 Install state of LIPS LX UFR II LIPS4 Lv 2 Details To display installation state of LIPS LX UFR II for outside Japan and LIPS4 functions when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether LIPS LX UFR II and LIPS4 functions are installed Adj set operate me...

Page 843: ...it Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST PSPCL Install state dis of PS PCL function Lv 2 Details To display installation state of PS PCL function when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether PS PCL function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST PSPCL 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key ...

Page 844: ... Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST PSLIP Install state dis of PS LIPS function Lv 2 Details To display installation state of PS LIPS function when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether PS LIPS function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST PSLIP 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key...

Page 845: ...e Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST LXUFR Install state dis of LIPS LX UFRII func Lv 2 Details To display installation state of LIPS LX UFR II for outside Japan function when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether LIPS LX UFR ll function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST LXUFR 2 Enter 0 and then pr...

Page 846: ...te target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST USB M Install state dis of print save from USB Lv 2 Details To display installation state of print save function from memory media when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether print save function from memory media is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST US...

Page 847: ...digits Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST JBLK Install state dis of info embedding func Lv 2 Details To display installation state of information embedding function when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether information embedding function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select...

Page 848: ...lue Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST REPDF Install state dis of PDF w reader extsn Lv 2 Details To display installation state of PDF function with reader extension when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether PDF function with reader extension is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST REPDF 2 Enter 0 and t...

Page 849: ...propriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST XPS Install state dis of XPS direct print Lv 2 Details To display installation state of XPS direct print function when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether XPS direct print function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST XPS 2 Enter 0 and then p...

Page 850: ...tails To set the image mode at the time of test print output This mode is enabled for test print only Use case At trouble analysis Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Display adj set range 0 to 6 0 Error diffusion 1 Low screen ruling screen approx 133 to 190 lines 2 High screen ruling screen approx 200 to 268 lines 3 Copy screen approx 220 lines 4 REOS scre...

Page 851: ...increased the density becomes higher Use case At test print TYPE 5 Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Display adj set range 0 to 255 Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER TEST PG DENS K Adj of Bk color density at test print Lv 1 Details To adjust Bk color density when perform...

Page 852: ...1 Output Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER TEST PG COLOR K Bk color output setting at test print Lv 1 Details To make a setting of Bk color output for test print The setting is applied to all types When setting COLOR K to 1 and other items to 0 a single Bk color is output Use case At test print Adj set operate me...

Page 853: ... trouble analysis Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Display adj set range 1 to 999 Unit 1 sheet Appropriate target value Default value 1 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER TEST PG FINISH Accessory processing function test print Lv 1 Details To execute the test print relating to accessory processing function Use cas...

Page 854: ...j set range 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 At normal state OK At failure occurrence NG Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo Remote host address IP address of PC terminal in network Loopback address 127 0 0 1 Checking TCP IP of this machine is available because the signal is returned before NIC NIC Network interface board Local...

Page 855: ...od Select the item and then press OK key Caution Display adj set range At normal state OK At failure occurrence NG 0 The board cannot be recognized 1 An error occurred to the result Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Approx 3 minutes Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER TEST NETWORK IPSECINT Interrupt test of IPSec Encryption Board Lv 1 Details To ex...

Page 856: ... Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER COUNTER TOTAL COPY Total copy counter Lv 1 Details To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine Large size 1 small size 1 A blank sheet is not counted Use case Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit Appropriate target value Default...

Page 857: ...ppropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER COUNTER TOTAL RPT PRT Report print counter Lv 1 Details To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at report print Large size 1 small size 1 A blank sheet is not counted Use case Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range 0 to ...

Page 858: ... Large size 1 Small size 1 Use case Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range Unit Number of sheets Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo C2 Cassette 2 pickup total counter Lv 1 Details Large size 1 Small size 1 Use case Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range Unit Number of sheets Appropriate target valu...

Page 859: ...ets Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo DK Deck pickup total counter Lv 1 Details Large size 1 Small size 1 Use case Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range Unit Number of sheets Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER COUNTER PICK UP 2 SID...

Page 860: ...OUNTER JAM TOTAL Printer total jam counter Lv 1 Details Use case When checking the total jam counter of printer Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range Unit Number of times Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo FEEDER Feeder total jam counter Lv 1 Details Use case When checking the total jam counter of feeder Adj se...

Page 861: ...opriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER COUNTER JAM C2 Left Deck jam counter Lv 1 Details Use case When checking the jam counter of machine s Left Deck Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range Unit Number of times Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement ...

Page 862: ...lue Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo T SPLY M M toner supply counter Lv 1 Details Number of M color toner supply blocks Counted for every one rotation of Toner Stirring Screw Use case When checking the usage status of toner Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range Unit Number of blocks Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required...

Page 863: ... start up Use case When checking the usage status of the product Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range Unit Number of times Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER COUNTER MISC ST NDL Staple needle counter Fin A1 C1 Lv 1 Details To count the use of the staple needle Use case Adj set operate method Caution Dis...

Page 864: ...5 JOB COPIER COUNTER JOB DVPAPLEN Average paper length of job Lv 1 Details Average paper length in the period from when the printer engine starts printing operation to when it stops the operation Since the printer engine considers small jobs that are executed continuously as a large job the average paper length affects calculation of the life Use case Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set...

Page 865: ...lue 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 TR BLT ITB parts counter Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the est...

Page 866: ... after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo This is commonly used as operator maintenance parts counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 PT DRM Bk Photosensitive Drum parts counter Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case...

Page 867: ...ropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 DV UNT K Developing Assembly Bk parts counter Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To clear the counter value Select ...

Page 868: ... value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 C2 FD RL Cassette2 Feed Roller parts counter Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To clear the counter value Select the item and t...

Page 869: ... 0 to 99999999 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 FX UNIT Fixing Assembly parts counter Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To clear the coun...

Page 870: ...priate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 PT DR Y Photosensitive Drum Y parts counter Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To clear the counter value Select th...

Page 871: ...ct the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo Regardless of the read mode 1 sided 2 sided the counter is adv...

Page 872: ...Supplement memo Regardless of the read mode 1 sided 2 sided the counter is advanced every time a sheet is fed COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 LNT TAP1 Dust collecting counter All Reader Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To clear the counter value Sele...

Page 873: ...e Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo The counter is advanced every time it is opened closed COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 PD PU RL Pickup Roller parts counter Deck Lv 1 Details Pickup Roller Front Rear of Paper Deck POD Deck Lite Multi Deck Upper 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts repl...

Page 874: ... adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 C3 FD RL Cassette3 Feed Roller parts counter Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate met...

Page 875: ...lue Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 FIN STPR Stapler parts counter Fin A1 C1 Lv 1 Details Stapler Unit 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To clear the counter value Select the item...

Page 876: ...99999999 Unit Number of times Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 FN BFFRL Buffer Roller parts counter Fin C1 Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method T...

Page 877: ... 99999999 Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 DL STC Stack Wall Sttc Elim prts cntr Fin A1 C1 Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To clear the...

Page 878: ...t Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo CYAN C Toner Container counter Lv 1 Details To count up in the unit of 0 1 C color Toner Container consumed Use case When checking the consumption volume of Toner Container Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Relate...

Page 879: ...display distribution of magenta video count Small size 1 Large size 1 Use case When checking distribution of video count Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER COUNTER V CNTR CYAN Video count C counter Lv 1 Details To display distribution of cyan video count Small s...

Page 880: ...display distribution of magenta video count Small size 1 Large size 2 Use case When checking distribution of video count Adj set operate method Caution Display adj set range Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo COPIER COUNTER V2 CNTR CYAN Video count C counter Lv 1 Details To display distribution of cyan video count Small ...

Page 881: ...ge value for the Post separation Sensor Use case When jams frequently occur Adj set operate method N A Display only Caution Display adj set range 0 to 255 Unit Appropriate target value Approx 113 Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo SPSN RCV Dis of Post sprtn Sensr recv voltage Lv 1 Details To display the light receiving voltage value for the Post sepa...

Page 882: ...ence of paper 179 or higher Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo T 8 82 ADJUST FEEDER ADJUST DOCST Adj of DADF img lead edge margin front Lv 1 Details To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image for DADF scanning Execute when the output image after DADF installation is dislocated Enter the value of service label when Reader Controller PCB is ...

Page 883: ... press OK key Caution Display adj set range 20 to 20 Unit 0 10 Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo FEEDER ADJUST ADJMSCN1 Zoom adj in 2 sided horz scan way front Lv 1 Details To make a fine adjustment of the front side image magnification in horizontal scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning As the value is in...

Page 884: ...n press OK key Caution Display adj set range 10 to 10 Unit 0 10 Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo T 8 83 FUNCTION FEEDER FUNCTION SENS INT Initialization of DADF Sensors Lv 1 Details To initialize DADF Sensors Use case When replacing Reader Controller PCB Post separation Sensor 1 SR2 Post separation Sensor 2 SR3 Post separ...

Page 885: ... the Original Width Volume VR When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Display adj set range Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo FEEDER FUNCTION TRY LTRR Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref2 LTRR Lv 1 Details To automatically adjust the p...

Page 886: ...me Approx 5 seconds Related service mode FEEDER FUNCTION CL CHK Related user mode Supplement memo FEEDER FUNCTION FAN CHK Specifying DADF Operation Fan Lv 1 Details To specify the DADF Fan to be operated The fan is activated by FAN ON Use case At operation check Adj set operate method Enter the value and then press OK key Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Motor Driver Cooling Fan FM1 1 Read M...

Page 887: ...lated service mode FEEDER FUNCTION SL CHK Related user mode Supplement memo FEEDER FUNCTION MTR ON Operation check of motor Lv 1 Details To start operation check for the motor specified by MTR CHK Use case At operation check Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and automatically stops 2 Press OK key The operation check is comp...

Page 888: ...n check for the feed mode specified by FEED CHK Use case At operation check Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Display adj set range Unit Appropriate target value Default value Required time Related service mode FEEDER FUNCTION FEED CHK Related user mode Supplement memo T 8 84 ...

Page 889: ...alue 0 Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo SORTER ADJUST STP F2 Adj frt staple pstn 45deg LTR Fin C1 Lv 1 Details To adjust the one front staple position on the LTR size paper As the value is incremented by 1 the staple position moves to the rear side by 0 49 mm Use case When misalignment occurs at the front staple position on LTR size paper Adj set...

Page 890: ...riate target value 0 Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo SORTER ADJUST SDL STP Adj of saddle staple position Fin C1 Lv 1 Details To adjust the staple position for saddle stitching As the value is incremented by 1 the staple position moves downward by 0 5 mm Use case When misalignment occurs at the fold position and the staple position for saddle sti...

Page 891: ...lt value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo SORTER ADJUST STP F3 Adj A4R frt stpl pstn 45 deg Fin C1 Lv 1 Details To adjust the one front staple position on the A4R size paper As the value is incremented by 1 the staple position moves to the rear side by 0 49mm Use case When misalignment occurs at the front staple position on A4R size paper Adj set operate metho...

Page 892: ...9 mm Appropriate target value 0 Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo SORTER ADJUST SW UP RL Adj of Swing Roller falling pstn Fin C1 Lv 1 Details To adjust the Swing Roller down position As the value is incremented by 1 the Swing Roller down position moves downward by 0 2mm Use case When paper fails to be transported to the Processing Tray and misalig...

Page 893: ...d time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo SORTER ADJUST DW CL Setting downward curl prev mode Fin C1 Lv 1 Details Set 1 when downward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack Tray and papers are not stacked accurately Use case When downward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack Tray and papers are not stacked accurately Adj set operate method Enter the setting ...

Page 894: ... then press OK key Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo SORTER ADJUST THN STC Set poor thin ppr stack prev mode Fin C1 Lv 1 Details Set 1 when thin paper is not appropriately stacked When 1 is set the stacking condition of thin paper improves Use case When thin paper is not...

Page 895: ...e Finisher operation noise is loud When 1 is set the initial Finisher operation is minimized Use case When the Finisher operation noise is loud Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo 1SHT SHF Set 1 sheet Off...

Page 896: ...Use case When the rear shift amount of the paper is inappropriate Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit 0 1 mm Appropriate target value 0 Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo SORTER ADJUST STP NTN Adj of Staple Needle pitch A4 Fin A1 Lv 1 Details To adjust the pitch between ne...

Page 897: ...ice mode Related user mode Supplement memo T 8 85 FUNCTION SORTER FUNCTION FIN CON Controller PCB RAM clear Fin C1 Lv 1 Details To execute the RAM clear of Finisher Controller PCB to delete all the adjustment contents and counter information Use case Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Output the service mode setting values by ...

Page 898: ...e Finisher Use case When changing the margin width of fold position Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Normal 1 Wider Unit Appropriate target value Default value 2 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo T 8 87 ...

Page 899: ... Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo BOARD OPTION MENU 3 Hide dis of printer setting menu level 3 Lv 2 Details To set whether to display or hide the level 3 of printer setting menu Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caut...

Page 900: ...on Lv 2 Details To set whether to display or hide the toner reduction function Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Unit Appropriate target value Default value 0 Required time Related service mode Related user mode Supplement memo The toner reduct...

Page 901: ...n Procedure Printer Cover C1 2 5 inch 80GB HDD C1 Removable HDD Kit AC1 HDD Mirroring Kit D1 2 5 inch 250GB HDD D1 Reader Heater Unit G1 Cassette Heater Unit 37 Cassette Heater Unit 32 Utility Tray A1 Key Switch Unit A2 Voice Operation Kit C1 Voice Guidance Kit F1 Card Reader C1 Inner 2 Way Tray F1 Additional Memory B 512MB Expansion Bus F1 IPSec Board B2 Wireless LAN Board B1 Unpacking C 1 opy Tr...

Page 902: ...9 9 9 2 9 2 ...

Page 903: ...any area near the faucet the water heater the humidifier or the refrigerator Operation image assured range temperature 15 0 to 30 0 deg C humidity 5 to 80 2 Keep the installation site away from the source of fire a dusty place or a place generating ammonia gas In the case of installing this equipment in a place subject to direct sunlight it is recommended to hang curtains over the window 3 Room od...

Page 904: ...llation Take note of the following points when installing this equipment 1 Moving this equipment from a low temperature place to a warm plate can generate condensation resulting in image fault Thus when unpacking this equipment leave it for 2 hours or more so that the equipment becomes comfortable with the room temperature Condensation formation of liquid drops from water vapor on metal surface an...

Page 905: ... the pages indicated in the following table 2 5inch 80GB HDD C1 2 5inch 250GB HDD D1 Removable HDD Kit AC1 HDD Mirroring Kit D1 HDD HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit C1 Reference Pages in the Manual According to Product Combination No Combination of Product Reference Pages in the Manual 1 HDD 80GB 250GB p 9 43 to p 9 56 2 Removable HDD Kit p 9 57 to p 9 75 3 HDD 80GB 250GB Removable HDD Kit 4 HDD ...

Page 906: ...2 Drum Unit Color x 3 3 Reversal Trail edge Guide x 1 8 Left Grip Cover x 2 4 Right Lower Sub Cover x 1 5 Size Plate x 2 6 Light Front Cover x 1 7 Light Grip Cover x 1 9 Waste Toner Container x 1 10 Service Book Case x 1 11 Power Cable x 1 1 2 F 9 6 F 9 6 ...

Page 907: ...D Guides Check the contents against the following USA 120V EUR 230V EUR 230V C5030 C5035 C5045 C5051 C5030i C5035i e Manual 1 3 3 Quick Reference 1 Frequently Asked Questions 1 Getting Started 1 Registration for Purchase in USA 1 Drum Unit Warranty 1 Installation Check List 1 Users Guide 1 1 MEAP Administration Software 1 1 1 UFR II User Software 1 1 PCL User Software 1 PS User Software Maintenanc...

Page 908: ... left or right to lift the host machine up and then put down the machine from the skid CAUTION The host machine weighs maximum 175kg It is recommended to lift it with 4 people or more However if there is a standard to handle a heavy load in each sales company follow it for operation Also make sure to lift the machine with keeping it level at operation Because the gravity center is in the rear lift...

Page 909: ... for the copier model refer to the Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 Color Image Reader Unit B1 B2 installation procedure When setting up for the printer model refer to the Printer Cover C1 stated in this procedure 4 Pull out the Cassette1 and 2 and remove the packing materials from them F 9 9 F 9 9 5 Open the Front Cover and the Right Lower Cover F 9 10 F 9 10 ...

Page 910: ...ushing down A claw insert the claw in 2 places and install the Right Front Cover 2 F 9 12 F 9 12 8 Insert the protrusion in 1 place While pushing down A claw insert the claw in 3 places and install the Right Rear Cover 3 x3 A F 9 13 F 9 13 9 Install the 2 Left Handle Covers 1 protrusion each 1 claw each x2 F 9 14 F 9 14 ...

Page 911: ...ase Lever is positioned in the direction of the arrow and if not turn it and adjust the position ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever direction of the arrow F 9 16 F 9 16 3 Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow and then fit the projection to the triangle mark on the plate to release the pressure ITB ITB Pressure Release Lever F 9 17 F 9 17 ...

Page 912: ... the other hand lift the dummy Drum up vertically and slowly to remove it If the dummy Drum is removed the seal can be removed simultaneously CAUTION If diagonally pulled out the seal might be damaged Be sure to pull it out flatly in upper direction and carefully Likely remove the Drum of each color Dummy Drum F 9 19 F 9 19 ...

Page 913: ...n an oblique direction the Seal on the Developing Assembly is stressed and may cause tear of the seal CAUTION If the Developing Seal is torn remove the torn seal by pulling the end of it in the direction of the arrow At that time be careful not to leave the torn seal in the Developing Assembly Seal Seal Front Side Rear Side F 9 20 F 9 20 F 9 21 F 9 21 ...

Page 914: ... attention to the below in doing the next procedure Do not touch the Drum area Do not make the Cover to be in contact with the Drum area Do not make the Drum area disposed of light for 5 minutes or more MEMO Step 7 to 8 is to install the Drum Unit of each color 7 Unpack the Drum Unit and remove the cover from the Drum Unit Claws 2pc CAUTION The cover might be stiff so proceed with extra care when ...

Page 915: ...ied the color Drums for the 3 colors green ones are not specified the color Y M C Drum for Bk Blue Position of Drum for Bk Drum for Color Green Position of Drum for Color F 9 24 F 9 24 MEMO Hold the handles at right and left of the Drum Unit Grip F 9 25 F 9 25 ...

Page 916: ... shutter may breaks Thus make sure to install it from just above F 9 26 F 9 26 8 Fit the guide of the Process Unit to the guide of the Drum Unit to install the Drum Unit Drum Unit Guide Process Unit Guide Process Unit Guide Drum Unit Guide F 9 27 F 9 27 ...

Page 917: ...reas of the Drum Unit are not off from the base F 9 28 F 9 28 10 Put the Process Unit back to the host machine and secure with the 2 screws CAUTION Check that there is no gap between the host machine and the Process Unit and then secure with the screw A A ...

Page 918: ...ment F 9 29 F 9 29 11 Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow and then fit the projection to the triangle mark on the plate to apply pressure CAUTION When pressuring the ITB Pressure Release Lever be sure that the Right Lower Cover is opened first before pressuring F 9 30 F 9 30 12 Install the ITB Cover and tighten the 2 screws which have been loosened ...

Page 919: ...he Lever back F 9 32 F 9 32 15 Close the Right Lower Cover the Right Upper Cover and the Front Cover Fixing the Machine in Place In the case that the pedestal is installed 1 Move the host machine to installing position turn the 4 adjusters of the pedestal with screwdriver and secure this host machine F 9 33 F 9 33 ...

Page 920: ...is the case that the value of the absolute water volume in the machine is about 12g or more Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG ABS HUM 1 Remove the Environment Heater Switch Cover CAUTION When removing the cover do not insert a screwdriver in the oval hole F 9 34 F 9 34 2 Turn ON the Environment Heater Switch F 9 35 F 9 35 3 Install the Environment Heater Switch Cover ...

Page 921: ...y initialization and toner refill they will be re executed when turning ON the power again 4 After activation follow the instruction in the Control Panel and press the shut down key in the Control Panel 5 Turn ON the main power switch 6 Enter the following Service Mode make sure that the setting value is 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW W SCNR 7 Set the value of the following Service Mode COPIER OPTION BODY...

Page 922: ...r Cartridges to open the Toner Replacement Cover F 9 37 F 9 37 MEMO Step 11 to 13 is to install the Toner Container of each color 11 Hold the Toner Container as the figure below and shake it approximately 10 times F 9 38 F 9 38 12 Remove the Protection Cap of the Toner Container while rotating it to the direction of the arrow F 9 39 F 9 39 ...

Page 923: ...ill will be executed Once the host machine goes to standby state drum initialization developing assembly initialization and toner refill are completed Turning OFF the Main Power Switch 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug ...

Page 924: ...e to be set and fit it to the slot 3 Hold the Trail Edge Guide Plate Lever and adjust it to the predefined size At that time move the Trail Edge Guide Plate by referring the size index label of the sheet size be set and fit it to the slot Side Guide Plate Lever Side Guide Plate Rear Edge Guide Plate Rear Edge Guide Plate Lever F 9 42 F 9 42 4 Set papers 5 Open the cover from which the Size Plate i...

Page 925: ...d store them at the rear F 9 45 F 9 45 8 Close the cover from which the Size Plate is pushed in and install the cassette 9 Set the other cassette in the same way 10 If the cassette pedestal is installed do the same for the cassette of the cassette pedestal as well MEMO Paper size settings are automatically recognized ...

Page 926: ... press OK 4 Then follow the direction displayed on UI Checking after the Installation 1 In Service Mode check the result of Drum Unit initialization Make sure that the value of the installed color is 0 to 2 Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY HV STS THCK Y Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY HV STS THCK M Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY HV STS THCK C MEMO If an error code E061 xxxx is displayed on the screen or the v...

Page 927: ...quivalent to the first side of the original Margin Adjustment 1st side Mechanical Adjsutment 1 Make copies using the Cassette 1 and 2 and check that the left edge margin is 2 5 1 5mm Feeding direction of paper L1 image F 9 46 F 9 46 In Case of Nonstandard MEMO Adjsutment method is same for both the Cassette 1 and 2 2 Pull out the cassette 3 Check the 2 scale positions on the adjusting plates F 9 4...

Page 928: ...tep 3 As moving the adjusting plate toward the rear by 1 scale the left edge margin becomes 1mm smaller MEMO When moving the scale be sure that the amount of the value to be moved are the same for the 2 points F 9 49 F 9 49 6 Tighten the fixing screw 7 Return the cassette to its original position ...

Page 929: ...hen the cassette positions are uneven due to the mechanical adjustment adjust them by loosening the screw at left side F 9 50 F 9 50 8 Make copies using the Cassette 1 and 2 and check that the left edge margin is 2 5 1 5mm ...

Page 930: ... 2 sided copy from cassette 2 and check that the left margin is 2 5 2 0mm 6 If the margin is out of the specification change the adjustment value for the left margin on the 2nd side in cassette 2 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C2RE 1 increment of the value reduces the left margin by 0 1mm 7 Write down the new adjustment value on the service label ADJ C1RE ADJ C2RE 8 Exit from Service Mode Margin Adjus...

Page 931: ... forth according to the value confirmed in step 2 Moving the Multi Purpose Tray Upper Cover to the rear of this equipment increases the left margin F 9 55 F 9 55 7 Tighten the fixing screw for the Multi Purpose Tray Upper Cover 8 Place paper on the Multi Purpose Tray 9 Make copy from the Multi Purpose Tray and check that the left margin is 2 5 1 5mm ...

Page 932: ...hine 4 Write down the new adjustment value on the service label ADJ MFRE Lead edge Margin Adjustment 1st side 1 Make copy from cassettte 1 and check that the lead edge margin is L1 4 0 1 5 1 0 mm If the lead edge margin is out of the specification go through the following steps to make adjustment Feeding direction of paper image L1 F 9 56 F 9 56 2 Select the following in Service Mode COPIER ADJUST...

Page 933: ...e following steps to make adjustment Feeding direction of paper image L1 F 9 57 F 9 57 2 Select the following in Service Mode COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG DUP1 3 Change the setting value to make adjustment 1 increment of the setting value reduces the lead edge margin by 0 1mm 4 To make the setting value effective turn OFF ON the main power of the Host Machine 5 Write down the new adjustment value on...

Page 934: ...vice Book Case to the following location Inside the machine inner side of the front cover Anywhere that blocks the louver area Anywhere that blocks the grip area MEMO In the case of machine confifuration without the cassette pedestal attach the Service Book Case to the Left Cover of this main unit Right Lower Sub Cover 1 1 Install the Right Lower Sub Cover 1 Perform this step in the case that the ...

Page 935: ...l the lever at upper area of the ADF and open the cover of the ADF reading area F 9 60 F 9 60 3 Open the Stamp Cover F 9 61 F 9 61 4 Using tweezers install the Stamp Cartridge with its stamp side faces up F 9 62 F 9 62 5 Close the Stamp Cover 6 Close the cover of the ADF reading area 7 Close the ADF ...

Page 936: ...Feed Cover Separation Guide F 9 63 F 9 63 2 Using tweezers install the Stamp Cartridge with its stamp side faces up F 9 64 F 9 64 3 Close the Feed Cover and the Separation Guide of the DADF Reversal Trail edge Guide Install the Reversal Trail edge Guide to the delivery assembly 2 claws Reversal Trail edge Guide x2 F 9 65 F 9 65 ...

Page 937: ...Registration Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings Use IPv4 4 Turn OFF the main power switch 5 Turn ON the main power switch Ping Operation Procedure CAUTION Ping command cannot be executed to Windows Vista PC from the Host Machine To execute Ping command to Windows Vista PC disable the Fire Wall Or execute Ping command to the Host Machine from Windows Vista PC 1 Select Settings Regist...

Page 938: ...host machine is correct Select the following Settings Registration Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings IP Address Settings and note the IP address in the IP Address field Select the following Settings Registration Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings PING Command and enter the IP address If the display shows Response from the host the IP address specified on the host mac...

Page 939: ...the Printer Cover 1 1 Printer Cover x 1 2 Top Front Cover x 1 3 Top Right Cover x 1 4 Top Left Cover x 1 5 Reader Fixing Hook A x 1 6 Reader Fixing Hook B x 2 7 Fixing Hook C x 1 8 Rubber Cap x 4 9 Screw Stepped Screw M4 x 1 10 Screw Flat Head Screw M4x6 x 2 11 Screw RS Tightening M3x8 5 x 2 12 Screw Blinding M4x8 x 8 F 9 66 F 9 66 ...

Page 940: ...edure Installation Procedure 1 Move the Control Panel in the direction of the arrow F 9 67 F 9 67 2 Move the Control Panel Mount Cover in the direction of the arrow 1 screw F 9 68 F 9 68 3 Check the installing position of the 2 Joints Right Install them on the L marking side if they are on the H marking side F 9 69 F 9 69 ...

Page 941: ...ix the Printer Cover 2 screws Binding M4x8 1 stepped screw M4 CAUTION Align the screw in left side to the emboss and tighten first Ensure not to pinch the USB cable If tighten a screw after removing USB cable ensure to re install the USB cable Stepped Screw x3 Embosses USB Cable F 9 71 ...

Page 942: ...Hook B x2 x2 Reader Fixing Hook A Fixing Hook C Emboss F 9 72 8 Install the Top Front Cover 2 screws RS Tightening M3x8 5 9 Install the Left Top Cover and Right Top Cover 4 screws Binding M4x8 4 rubber caps Top Front Cover x6 Top Right Cover Top Left Cover Screw RS Tightening M3x8 5 Screw RS Tightening M3x8 5 F 9 73 10 Return the Control Panel Mount Cover 11 Return the Control Panel ...

Page 943: ...llowing installation procedures Item in HDD Mirroring Kit D1 described in this manual Refer to the Installation Manual and Instruction Sheet of CASE 1 and CASE 2 packed with the HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit C1 6 Installation procedures are the same between the 2 5inch 80GB HDD C1 and 2 5inch 250GB HDD D1 When installing the HDD options 5 products indicated below refer to the pages indicated i...

Page 944: ...ments documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO H Single Sign On H Yes Registration information ...

Page 945: ... with the MEAP application Data stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box See the e Manual Remote UI Setting the Backup Location for Stored Data Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image SSO H Single Sign On H user authentication information See the e Manual MEAP Quick Menu Information See the e Manual Quick Menu User Information of the Advanced Box See the e Manual Security Caution Work to Perfo...

Page 946: ...e user name and password appears Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password in Password and then click Administrator Login 2 Select Settings Registration Management Settings Data Management Import Export 3 Click Device Settings Forwarding Settings Address List Favorite Settings 4 Click Export and then click Start Export 5 Following the instructions on the window specify the lo...

Page 947: ...he MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of data in the course of installing the kit The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications Disabling of the license and download of an Disabled license file is described below For more information see the MEAP SMS Administrator Guide 7 Stop of MEAP Applications Disabling Download of Disabled License Files and Uninstallation 1 Select...

Page 948: ...t be performed The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below Specify the backup destination of a document data Specify an address a user name a password and a path to the SMB server where a backup of a document data Caution Data which cannot be backed up If you back up restore stored data without restarting the machine after changing the language displayed on th...

Page 949: ...nformation Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system administrator ID and password are set a dialog box to enter the user name and password appears Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password in Password and then click Administrator Login 2 Select Basic Tools Quick Menu Export 3 If the file needs to be en...

Page 950: ...GB HDD D1 1 HDD Support Plate x 1 2 HDD x 1 3 Vibration prevention Dumpe x 4 4 Spacer x 4 5 HDD Grounding Plate x 1 6 Screw W sems M3x14 x 4 7 Screw TP M3x6 x 2 CD GUIDS Notice for FCC IC China RoHS Notice 3 Turning OFF the Main Power Switch Refer to Turning OFF the Main Power Switch in Main Unit Installation Procedure F 9 74 ...

Page 951: ... spacers 1 HDD Grounding Plate 4 screws binding with flat washer M3x14 1 piece is used to fix the HDD Grounding Plate altogether x4 Option HDD HDD Support Plate Spacer Vibration prevention Dumpe HDD Grounding Plate F 9 75 Caution Assembling the option HDD be careful of the installation direction Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up Make sure that A part of HDD Support Plate is p...

Page 952: ...1 1 screw F 9 78 3 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable from the HDD x2 Signal Cable Power Cable F 9 79 4 Put the Signal Cable and the Power Cable aside so that thay are not pinched between the Controller Box and the HDD Unit F 9 80 5 Rmove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below 2 screws x2 F 9 81 ...

Page 953: ... The screw removed in step 1 x2 F 9 83 CAUTION At installation be sure to install the Grounding Plate inside the A part of HDD Fixing Plate A A Grounding Plate Grounding Plate F 9 84 3 Install the HDD Unit to the host machine 4 Install the Signal Cable and the Power Cable to the Option HDD 5 Close the HDD Lid 6 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 7 Close the Right Lower Cover 8 Close the Right Upper Cove...

Page 954: ...Mirroring 1 Install the assembled Option HDD to the removed HDD Unit 2 screws TP M3X6 x2 F 9 85 CAUTION At installation be sure to install the Grounding Plate inside the A part of HDD Fixing Plate A A Grounding Plate Grounding Plate F 9 86 ...

Page 955: ... Encryption Mirroring Kit C1 4 screws TP M3X6 x4 F 9 87 3 Install the HDD Unit to the host machine MEMO When the option HDD Unit has been expanded the Mirroring Kit D1 or the HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit C1 needs to be installed Refer to the each installation procedure and make an installation ...

Page 956: ...tem software in the PC on which the SST is used 2 Start up the SST 3 Click copy to copy the system software 4 Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set and click search 5 Click copy 6 Click OK 4 Downloading the System Software 1 Click connect 2 From the list of machine series select the appropriate model 3 Select single and click start 4 Execute HDD format 5 After 5 sec from wh...

Page 957: ...cked with the HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit C1 4 To expand this equipment be sure to install the 2 HDDs with same capacity When installing the HDD options 5 products indicated below refer to the pages indicated in the following table 2 5inch 80GB HDD C1 2 5inch 250GB HDD D1 Removable HDD Kit AC1 HDD Mirroring Kit D1 HDD HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit C1 Reference Pages in the Manual Accordi...

Page 958: ... Plate Shaft x 2 4 HDD Cover x 2 5 HDD Blanking Plate x 1 6 HDD Door Guide x 1 7 HDD Lock Plate x 1 9 HDD Lid Retainer x 1 10 Shutdown Caution Label x 1 11 Connector Fixing Block x 2 12 Conversion Connector x 2 13 Signal Cable 660mm FK2 8432 x 1 14 IV Cable FK2 8453 x 1 15 Power Cable 650mm FK2 8464 x 1 1 1 2 F 9 88 ...

Page 959: ...w P Tight M3X8 x 4 F 9 89 1 This is used when installing the HDD Mirroring Kit D1 2 This is used when only the standard HDD of host machine is used for a removable HDD Turning OFF the Main Power Switch Refer to Turning OFF the Main Power Switch in Main Unit Installation Procedure ...

Page 960: ... 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw Claw x3 F 9 91 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 92 5 Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable x2 Control Panel Communication Cable USB Cable F 9 93 ...

Page 961: ...2 Grips F 9 94 7 Hold the 2 Grips and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1 approximately 10mm toward front F 9 95 8 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 5 claws x2 x5 claw F 9 96 9 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable F 9 97 ...

Page 962: ...er F 9 98 11 Remove the Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 1 claw x2 claw F 9 99 12 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 screws x2 Harness F 9 100 MEMO If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 Harness F 9 101 ...

Page 963: ...2 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 103 15 Open the HDD Lid 1 scrwe Removed screw will not be used F 9 104 16 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable 2 dege saddles 5 wire saddles 2 connectors MEMO When installing other option HDD Mirroring Kit D1 or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit C1 removed Signal Cable will be reused The Power Cable will not be used Connectors Edge Saddl Signal Ca...

Page 964: ...rews Removed screw will not be used x2 F 9 106 18 Remove the fixed HDD from the removed HDD Unit Removed plate and screw will not be used 2 screws x2 F 9 107 19 Remove the HDD from the HDD Support Plate 1 HDD Grounding Plate 4 screws HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Grounding Plate x4 F 9 108 ...

Page 965: ...w hole Connector Label F 9 109 20 Install the HDD Connector Plate first and then HDD to the HDD Support Plate HDD Grounding Plate and screw are the ones removed in step 19 1 HDD Grounding Plate 4 screws 1 piece is used to fix the HDD Grounding Plate altogether x4 HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate HDD Grounding Plate F 9 110 21 Fix the Grounding Plate 1 screw TP round end M3X6 F 9 111 ...

Page 966: ...ble HDD Kit 4 screws binding with flat washer M3X14 enclosed with option HDD 1 piece is used to fix the HDD Grounding Plate altogether x5 Option HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate Spacer Vibration prevention Dumpe HDD Grounding Plate TP round end M3X6 F 9 112 23 Install the Conversion Connector Caution Make sure that there is no opening between the Conversion Connector and part of HDD F 9 1...

Page 967: ...9 9 9 67 9 67 25 Install the HDD Cover 1 claw 1 screw TP round end M3X6 F 9 115 26 Install the HDD Handle 2 screws TP round end M3X6 x2 F 9 116 27 Install the HDD Door Guide 2 claws Claws x2 F 9 117 ...

Page 968: ...careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate F 9 118 28 Install the HDD Lock Plate 2 HDD Lock Plate Shafts 2 Hinge Shaft Stoppers HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Hinge Shaft Stoppers F 9 119 ...

Page 969: ...to the hole and install the HDD Lid Retainer 1 screw TP round end M3X6 Holes Bosses F 9 120 30 Remove the HDD Rear Cover Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used 2 screws Removed screw will be used to install the HDD Drawer Unit x2 F 9 121 ...

Page 970: ...saddle of HDD Drawer Unit is facing up remove the lower Drawer Cable Slot 2 2 screws 2 springs 2 washers x2 Washer Spring Screw Drawer Cable Edge Saddle F 9 122 2 Remove the Drawer Cable 2 screws Removed screw will be used in step 3 x2 F 9 123 3 Install the IV Cable 2 screws screw removed in step 2 x2 F 9 124 ...

Page 971: ...r Unit 2 screws the screws removed in step 28 in Installing Removable HDD Kit x2 F 9 126 6 Fix the cable of the Drawer Unit 3 wire saddles MEMO Close the A part of unused wire saddle and edge saddle Short Signal Cable and Power Cable will not be used Fix the unused Signal Cable and the Power Cable with the wire saddle A A Wire saddles x3 F 9 127 c ...

Page 972: ...ddle Wire Saddles Connectors x2 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable F 9 128 8 Install the Conroller Cover Caution Be sure that the gaskets on left right side of the Controller Cover are not protruded 9 Install the HDD Blanking Plate to Slot 1 2 screws TP round end M3X6 x2 F 9 129 10 Install the HDD to Slot 2 right side F 9 130 ...

Page 973: ... Sub Cover Reader Communication Cable when reader is installed Left Rear Cover USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable 15 Install the Main Controller PCB 1 to the host machine CAUTION Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install the 2 screws Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is in...

Page 974: ...Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles B A F 9 133 17 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover ...

Page 975: ...removed in step 28 in Installing the Removable HDD Kit x2 F 9 134 2 Install the originally installed HDD to Slot 1 left side F 9 135 3 Install the Option HDD to Slot 2 right side F 9 136 4 Close the HDD Lid MEMO To proceed to the later steps refer to the installation procedure of Mirroring Kit D1 or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit C1 ...

Page 976: ...80GB HDD C1 2 5inch 250GB HDD D1 Removable HDD Kit AC1 HDD Mirroring Kit D1 HDD HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit C1 Reference Pages in the Manual According to Product Combination No Combination of Product Reference Pages in the Manual 1 HDD 80GB 250GB p 9 43 to p 9 56 2 Removable HDD Kit p 9 57 to p 9 75 3 HDD 80GB 250GB Removable HDD Kit 4 HDD 80GB 250GB HDD Mirroring Kit p 9 43 to p 9 56 p 9 76...

Page 977: ...One piece is used 4 6 pieces are used for this machine 4 out of 10 pieces are used when installing the Option HDD 5 Used when installing the option HDD 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 Signal Cable 450mm Red FK2 8435 x 1 2 Signal Cable 80mm Red FK2 8436 x 1 3 Signal Cable 80mm Blue FK2 8438 x 1 4 Power Cable 80mm FK2 8461 x 2 5 Power Cable 430mm FK2 8463 x 2 8 LED Board Small x 1 9 Encryption Board x 1 7...

Page 978: ...ard large x 1 5 LED Cable 290mm FM4 0840 x 1 6 STS Cable 420mm FM4 0843 x 1 7 Wire saddle large x 1 9 LED Label large x 1 8 Wire saddle Middle x 1 CD Guide HDD Mirroring Kit D1 User Documentation Notice for FCC IC China RoHS Notice 3 Turning OFF the Main Power Switch Refer to Turning OFF the Main Power Switch in Main Unit Installation Procedure F 9 138 ...

Page 979: ...pen the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw Claw x3 F 9 140 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 141 5 Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable x2 Control Panel Communication Cable USB Cable...

Page 980: ...Grips F 9 143 7 Hold the 2 Grips and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1 approximately 10mm toward front F 9 144 8 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 5 claws x2 x5 claw F 9 145 9 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable F 9 146 ...

Page 981: ...r F 9 147 11 Remove the Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 1 claw x2 claw F 9 148 12 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 screws x2 Harness F 9 149 MEMO If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 Harness F 9 150 ...

Page 982: ...able retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddles Connectors x2 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 152 15 Open the HDD Lid 1 scrwe Removed screw will not be used F 9 153 16 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable Removed cables will not be used 2 dege saddles 5 wire saddles 2 connectors Connectors Edge Saddl Signal Cable Power Cable Edge Saddle Wire Saddle Wire Saddles x2 x7 F 9 154...

Page 983: ...le guide 1 connector CAUTION Be sure to allow extra cable at A area in the condition that the Controller Box is fully opened Be sure to tuck the B area of the LED cable under the other 2 cables running through the B area This is to prevent the B area of the LED cable from being slacked off when closing the Controller Box Cable Guide Wire Saddle Edge Saddle LED Cable 1200mm Connector x8 Wire Saddle...

Page 984: ... to the case when the Removable HDD is installed If it is installed in a wrong direction the cables do not reach the board CHB CHA Direction of the HDD Slot x4 F 9 158 2 Install the cables to the PCB on the backside Communication Cable 450mm Red FK2 8435 Power Cable 430mm FK2 8463 STS Cable 550mm FM4 0842 3 Fix the cables 3 wire saddles 1 edge saddle Cable retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire ...

Page 985: ...30mm FK2 8463 LED Cable 1200mm FM4 0839 STS Cable 550mm FM4 0842 CAUTION The machine can operate even the STS Cable and the LED Cable are not connected Therefore when installing the cables be sure that they are connected properly Power Cable Signal Cable STS Cable LED Cable x4 F 9 160 6 Fix the cables 4 wire saddles 1 edge saddle MEMO Be sure to close the unused wire saddle A Wire Saddles Wire Sad...

Page 986: ... Mirroring Board are shown below Connect Slot 1 to CHA Originally installed HDD Connect Slot 2 to CHB New HDD Slot 2 HDD2 Slot 1 HDD1 CH B CH A Signal Cable Red Signal Cable Blue Power Cable Power Cable F 9 162 7 Install the Signal Cable 80mm Red FK2 8436 and the Power Cable 80mm FK2 8461 to CHA on the Mirroring Board x2 Signal Ccable Power Cable F 9 163 ...

Page 987: ... Cable 80mm FK2 8461 to the first HDD Slot 1 CAUTION Install the cables to correct positions x2 Signal Cable Power Cable F 9 164 9 Install the Signal Cable 80mm Blue FK2 8438 and the Power Cable 80mm FK2 8461 to CHB on the Mirroring Board x2 Signal Cable Power Cable F 9 165 ...

Page 988: ...al Cable Ppower Cable F 9 166 11 Fix the cables with the wire saddle Wire Saddle F 9 167 CAUTION Be sure to place the tags on the Power Supply Cable in the position where it is beyond the wire saddle toward the HDD side If returning the Controller Box while placing the cables and tags toward the PCB side they may interfere the fan on the host machine Wire Saddle Tag F 9 168 ...

Page 989: ... Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install the 2 screws Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly Grips x2 F 9 169 16 If Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable MEMO Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reade...

Page 990: ...9 9 9 90 9 90 18 Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Rear Cover 1 LED Label F 9 171 19 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover ...

Page 991: ...es do not reach the board x4 CHB CHA Direction of the DC Controller PCB F 9 172 2 Install the cables to the PCB on the backside Signal Cable FK2 8432 660mm Use the existing cable Power Cable 650mm FK2 8464 Included in the Removable HDD Kit STS Cable 550mm FM4 0842 3 Fix the cables 3 wire saddles 1 edge saddle Cable retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddles Connector x3 x4 STS Cable Power Ca...

Page 992: ...CAUTION The machine can operate even the STS Cable and the LED Cable are not connected Therefore when installing the cables be sure that they are connected properly LED Cable STS Cable Signal Cable x4 Power Cable F 9 175 7 Fix the cables 7 wire saddles 1 edge saddle MEMO Be sure to close the unused wire saddle A Edge Saddle Wire Saddles Wire Saddles Wire Saddles Edge Saddle x9 F 9 176 ...

Page 993: ...chine when returing the Controller Box Wire Saddles A B F 9 177 CAUTION Be sure to acknowledge the following caution before performing the next procedure Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Mirroring Board are shown below Connect Slot 1 to CHA Originally installed HDD Connect Slot 2 to CHB New HDD Slot 2 HDD2 Slot 1 HDD1 CH A CH B Power Cable Signal Cable Red Signal Cable Blue Powe...

Page 994: ... 179 9 Place the Controller Box to the original position 10 Affix the Shutdowm Warning Label in the appropriate language on the Right Rear Cover 1 included in the Removable HDD Kit F 9 180 11 Install the removed cover and the cable Rear Cover Left Rear Sub Cover Reader Communication Cable when reader is installed Left Rear Cover USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable ...

Page 995: ...lowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly Grips x2 F 9 181 13 If Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable MEMO Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles B A F 9 182 14 Install the Right ...

Page 996: ...D2 Slot 2 The green and red LEDs blink CAUTION Rebuild process starts after setting 1 for W RAID If an error occurs during the rebuild process at the initial installation The hard disk needs to be replaced Call service rep reexecute the process with the following procedure 1 Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2 2 Select Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNCSW W RAID and set 0 3 To enable the setting v...

Page 997: ... 1 Reader Heater X 1 2 Flat Screw M4X4 X 4 3 Heater Sheet X 1sheet 3 sheets are used in this Installation procedure Turning OFF the power of the Host Machine Be sure to refer to How to Disconnect the Main Power in the Host Machine installation F 9 184 F 9 184 ...

Page 998: ... Screws x2 F 9 186 F 9 186 3 Remove the Reader Cable Cover 2 Screws x2 F 9 187 F 9 187 4 Remove the Copyboard Glass F 9 188 F 9 188 Caution When removing the Copyboard Glass be sure not to touch your finger to the white plate in the surface and the backside of the glass If it is dirty clean it with lint free paper F 9 189 F 9 189 ...

Page 999: ... heater sheet to the marking line and adhere them Marking Line Heater Sheet F 9 190 F 9 190 6 Install the Reader Heater 4 Flat Screws M4 Caution Do not scratch the surface of the Guide Shaft x4 Reader Heater Guide Shaft F 9 191 F 9 191 ...

Page 1000: ...9 9 9 100 9 100 7 Pass the connector under the rail as shown F 9 192 F 9 192 Caution Do not scratch surface of the wire and the Scanner Rail Wire Scanner Rail F 9 193 F 9 193 ...

Page 1001: ... the direction of the arrow pass the harness and make space A A Screw F 9 194 F 9 194 9 Pass the harnesses to the claw of the FFC Guide in 4 places MEMO Make sure that the harnesses are securely fixed x4 Claw of the FFC Guide Claw of the FFC Guide F 9 195 F 9 195 ...

Page 1002: ...sened in step 8 after adjusting it to the boss MEMO Make sure that the sheet is placed on the plate F 9 197 F 9 197 12 Install the removed covers Copyboard Glass Reader Cable Cover Reader Right Retainer Cover 13 Close the ADF or the Copyboard Cover 14 Insert the power plug of main unit into a socket 15 Open the Switch Cover and turn the main power switch ON ...

Page 1003: ...Heater Switch cover F 9 198 F 9 198 2 Check that the Environment Heater Switch is ON 3 Turn ON if it was OFF F 9 199 F 9 199 4 Install the Environment Heater Switch cover 5 Check that the breaker switch in the back of the main unit is ON 5 6 Turn ON if it was OFF F 9 200 F 9 200 7 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet ...

Page 1004: ...sette Heater Unit 37 Checking the Contents 1 Cassette Heater Unit x 1 5 Screw P Tight M3x8 x 1 2 Heater Connector Cover x 1 3 Wire Saddle x 1 4 Screw Ｗ Sems Round End M3X6 x 1 Not used with this procedure F 9 201 F 9 201 ...

Page 1005: ... in the host machine t or the cassette pedestal 1 Press the Cassette Release Button to remove the Cassette Host Machine Cassettes 1 and 2 Cassette pedestal Cassette 3 and 4 Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Cassette Release Button Cassette Release Button F 9 202 F 9 202 2 Remove the Heater Connector Cover with a flat blade screwdriver 1 claw 2 protrusions Claw Heater Connector Cover Prot...

Page 1006: ... the Base Plate properly Cassette Heater Unit Base Plate Cassette Heater Unit Base Plate F 9 204 F 9 204 4 Tighten the removed screw W sems round end M3X6 with the stubby driver to connect the connector The figure below shows an example of the Cassette Pedestal Follow the same step as for the host machine Connector F 9 205 F 9 205 5 Install the heater Connector Cover 6 Install the removed Cassette...

Page 1007: ...nvironment Heater Switch Cover F 9 206 F 9 206 2 Check that the Environment Heater Switch is ON 3 Turn ON if it was OFF F 9 207 F 9 207 4 nstall the Environment Heater Switch Cover 5 Check that the breaker switch in the back of the main unit is ON 6 Turn ON if it was OFF F 9 208 F 9 208 7 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet ...

Page 1008: ...nit Turning OFF the Main Power Switch Refer to Turning OFF the Main Power Switch in Main Unit Installation Procedure When installing the heater to the paper deck take the following precautions a The AC power plug of the host machine must have been removed from the outlet b Install the heater after installing the host machine and paper deck c Use correct screws lengths and diameters at correct posi...

Page 1009: ...from the host machine and then press down the latch plate of the paper deck housing with your finger to open the housing F 9 222 F 9 222 3 Remove three screws and then detach the right cover of the paper deck in the direction of the arrow shown x3 F 9 223 F 9 223 4 Remove four screws and two other screw and then detach the rear cover of the paper deck x6 F 9 224 F 9 224 ...

Page 1010: ...rotection bushing to the hole on the top panel of the paper deck F 9 227 F 9 227 8 Place the heater unit under the top panel of the paper deck and then take the connector out of the hole on the top plate 9 Insert the two hooks of the heater unit into the holes on the top plate of the paper deck and then secure the heater unit to the main body of the paper deck using a screw with toothed washer x1 ...

Page 1011: ... cord mount of the paper deck x1 F 9 230 F 9 230 12 12 Install the supplied AC input connector in two steps A B Install the ground cable using a screw with toothed washer B A x1 F 9 231 F 9 231 13 Install the relay harness unit to the rear side panel of the paper deck using the two screws M4X8 and then connect the connector x2 F 9 232 F 9 232 ...

Page 1012: ...Take care not to have cables caught M4X8 2 pcs 2 Front upper cover Insert the connector M4X8 3 pcs 3 Rear cover M3X8 2 pcs M4X8 4 pcs 4 Right cover M4X8 3 pcs 16 Manually slide the paper deck to the left to place it aside of the host machine 17 Attach reusable band and then connect the connector of the paper deck to the back of the host machine F 9 234 F 9 234 18 Stick the power supply label to th...

Page 1013: ...36 20 Attach two wire saddles to the rear panel of the host machine and then connect the AC cable connector to the power cord mount of the heater Route the AC cable as shown and then connect the other connector plug to the receptacle on the rear panel of the host machine F 9 237 F 9 237 ...

Page 1014: ...ind head M4x4 removed at the step 19 x1 F 9 238 F 9 238 To ensure smooth connection of the heater power connectors explain to the user that any obstacle that can prevent the paper deck from opening should not be placed in the hatched area 1 Host machine 2 Paper deck A Front 1 2 A F 9 239 F 9 239 ...

Page 1015: ...10 x 2 3 Screw TP M4x14 x 4 1 The parts using to install the Keyboard Installation Procedure 1 Loosen the 2 screws on the Utility Tray Unit to separate the Mounting Plate and the Utility Tray Screws F 9 241 F 9 241 2 Remove the 4 face seals from the Reader Right Cover Face Seals F 9 242 F 9 242 F 9 240 F 9 240 ...

Page 1016: ...9 9 9 116 9 116 3 Install the Mounting Plate 4 screws TP M4x10 x4 F 9 243 F 9 243 4 Install the Keyboard Tray 2 screws loosen 2 screws tighten TP M4 x 10 x2 F 9 244 F 9 244 ...

Page 1017: ...9 9 9 117 9 117 When installing the Keyboard 1 Remove the 2 cap covers and install the 5 wire saddles Cap Cover Wire Saddle F 9 245 F 9 245 ...

Page 1018: ... A2 Checking the Content 1 Key Switch Unit x 1 2 Control Key x 1 3 Screw Binding M4 6 x 1 Turning OFF the power of the Host Machine Be sure to refer to How to Disconnect the Main Power in the Host Machine installation F 9 246 F 9 246 ...

Page 1019: ...ght Upper Cover in the same time F 9 247 F 9 247 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 Screw RS Tightening M4 2 Screws TP M3 Claw in 1 place Claw x3 F 9 248 F 9 248 4 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Rubber caps 2 Screw Claw in 5 places x2 Claw x5 F 9 249 F 9 249 ...

Page 1020: ... 1 place Claw x2 F 9 250 F 9 250 6 Remove the Connector Cover 1 Screw F 9 251 F 9 251 7 Remove the connector of the Cassette Pedestal If the Pedestal is not installed this procedure is not needed Harness Guide in 6 places 5 Connectors x5 Connector x6 Guide F 9 252 F 9 252 ...

Page 1021: ...over 2 Rubber caps 2 Screws Claw in 2 places Hook in 2 places x2 Claw Claw x2 Hook Hook F 9 253 F 9 253 9 Remove the Right Rear Cover 3 Claw in 3 places Claw x3 Claw F 9 254 F 9 254 10 Remove the Right Rear Cover 2 2 Screws x2 F 9 255 F 9 255 ...

Page 1022: ...2 Install the Key Switch Unit to the Key Switch Bracket 1 Screw Binding M4x6 F 9 257 F 9 257 13 Install the Key Switch Bracket assembled in the previous procedure 2 Screws use the screw removed in step 11 x2 F 9 258 F 9 258 14 Open the Feed Driver PCB 2 Screws x2 F 9 259 F 9 259 ...

Page 1023: ... original position 17 Cut the A part of the removed Right Rear Cover 2 in step 10 with nipper etc A F 9 261 F 9 261 18 Reinstall the removed covers and the connectors Right Rear Cover 2 Right Rear Cover 3 Rear Lower Cover Cconnector of the Cassette Pedestal Connector Cover Rear Cover Left Rear Cover Right Rear Cover 1 Right Lower Cover Right Upper Cover ...

Page 1024: ...en the switch cover and turn ON the main power switch 3 Set the following service mode value to 1 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL KEY 4 Turn OFF ON the main power switch 5 Make sure that Set the control key is displayed 6 Insert the Control key into the Key Switch Unit and make sure that the machine is ready for copy ...

Page 1025: ... 1 10 Screw Binding M4X6 X 1 7 Wire Saddle X 3 5 Ring Core X 1 6 Cord Guide X 7 1 Not used in this Installation procedure 2 1 piece is used in this Installation procedure 3 2 pieces are used in this Installation procedure CD Guide Voice Guidance Kit Users Guide Voice Operation Kit Users Guide Voice Operation Quick Reference Guide Voice Guidance Guide CD Voice Operation Kit Manual CD FCC IC Instruc...

Page 1026: ...ssory Installation Turning OFF the Host Machine Be sure to refer to the Host Machine Installation How to disconnect main power Installation Procedure 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Open also the Right Delivery Unit in the same time F 9 263 F 9 263 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 Screw RS Tight M4 2 Screws TP M3 Claw in 1 place Claw x3 F 9 264 F 9 264 ...

Page 1027: ...addle 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 265 F 9 265 5 Remove the USB cable and Control Panel Communication Cable x2 Control Panel Communication Cable USB Cable F 9 266 F 9 266 6 Remove the 2 screws open the grip in 2 places x2 Grips F 9 267 F 9 267 ...

Page 1028: ... the Main Controller Roller PCB 1 Do not use the removed Support Voice Operation Board 2 Screws removed screw will be used in step 9 x2 F 9 269 F 9 269 9 Install the Voice Operation Board Unit in the Main Controller Roller PCB 1 1 Connector 2 screws 2 Screws that removed in step 8 2 Screws TP M3x6 MEMO Make sure that the connector is properly installed x4 Connector F 9 270 F 9 270 ...

Page 1029: ...imultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly Grip x2 F 9 271 F 9 271 11 Install the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable 12 If Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable MEMO Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Gui...

Page 1030: ... Right Rear Cover 1 with nipper etc A A F 9 274 F 9 274 15 Install the Right Rear Cover 1 MEMO Do not close the Right Rear Cover 1 16 Close the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 17 Remove the Rubber Cap screw the Cover Seal from the Reader Right Cover Do not use the removed Rubber Cap screw and Cover Seal Rubber Cap Cover Seal F 9 275 F 9 275 ...

Page 1031: ...ed screw will be used in step 20 x2 Speaker Unit Lower F 9 276 F 9 276 19 Install the Speaker Unit Lower 2 Screws Binding M4x20 x2 F 9 277 F 9 277 20 Install the Speaker Unit Upper 2 screws screws that removed in step 18 x2 F 9 278 F 9 278 21 Remove the Cord Guide Cover F 9 279 F 9 279 ...

Page 1032: ...f the Cover Seal and install the 2 Wire Saddles Cover Seal Cord Guide Wire Saddles F 9 280 F 9 280 24 Install the Ring Core to both sides of the DVI Cable and remove the cap Cap DVI Cable Ring Core F 9 281 F 9 281 25 Connect both sides of the DVI Cable respectively F 9 282 F 9 282 ...

Page 1033: ...3 26 Pass the DVI Cable through the hole of the Right Rear Cover 1 and close the cover F 9 283 F 9 283 27 Pass DVI Cable to the Cord Guide and install the cover 28 Fix the DVI Cable to the Wire Saddle F 9 284 F 9 284 ...

Page 1034: ...ess Reset Key and Voice Recognition Button for 3 secs or more 2 In the operation screen Voice Navigation select one of the following Manual Vocal Mode Vocal Mode Manual Mode and press OK 3 The display in Panel Screen if the display in panel screen is boxed with red frame Voice Guidance Kit is available MEMO If Manual Mode is selected in Voice Navigation nothing is going to happen even if Voice Rec...

Page 1035: ...aker Unit Upper X 1 2 Speaker Unit Lower X 1 3 Voice Guidance Board Unit X 1 4 Speaker Cable X 1 5 Cord Guide X 7 6 Ring Core X 2 11 Screw TP M3X6 X 2 10 Screw Binding M4X6 X 1 7 Screw Binding M4X20 X 2 8 Screw Binding M4X16 X 2 9 Screw Binding M3X16 X 1 3 F 9 285 F 9 285 ...

Page 1036: ...D GUIDES Voice Guidance kit Users Guide Voice Guidance Guide CD Sheet FCC IC Points to note when Installing Caution The Color Image Reader is necessary to operate this equipment When installing the equipment see the Combination Table of Accessory Installation Turning OFF the Host Machine Be sure to refer to Host Machine Installation How to disconnect main power ...

Page 1037: ... Rear Cover 1 1 Screw RS Tight M4 2 Screws TP M3 Claw in 1 place Claw x3 F 9 287 F 9 287 4 If reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 Connectors 2 wire Saddle 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 288 F 9 288 5 Remove the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable x2 Control Panel Communication Cable USB Cable F 9 289 F 9 289 ...

Page 1038: ...the grip in 2 places remove the Main Controller PCB 1 while avoiding the removed harness F 9 291 F 9 291 8 Remove the Voice Operation Board Support Plate from the Main Controller PCB 1 Do not use the removed Support Voice Operation Board 2 Screws removed screw will be used in step 9 x2 F 9 292 F 9 292 ...

Page 1039: ...he connector is installed properly x4 Connector F 9 293 F 9 293 10 Install the Main Controller PCB 1 in the Host Machine Caution Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install the 2 screws Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly Grip x2 F 9 294 F 9 294 ...

Page 1040: ...le from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles B A F 9 295 F 9 295 13 Remove the small cover installed in the Right Rear Cover 1 1 Screw Claw in 2 places 爪 x2 F 9 296 F 9 296 14 Cut the A part of Right Rear Cover 1 with nipper etc A A F 9 297 F 9 297 ...

Page 1041: ...he Right Upper Cover 17 Remove the Rubber Cap screw and Cover Seal from the Reader Right Cover Do not use the removed Rubber Cap screw and Cover Seal Rubber Cap Cover Seal F 9 298 F 9 298 18 Install the Speaker Unit lower 2 Screws Bind M4x20 x2 F 9 299 F 9 299 19 Install the Speaker Unit Upper 1 Screw Bind M4x6 F 9 300 F 9 300 ...

Page 1042: ...F 9 301 22 Peel off the paper liner and affix them in 3 places in the Cord Guide as shown in the figure MEMO If this is used together with the Card Reader C1 Use the wire saddle enclosed with the Card Reader Installation Kit B1 to the A area A F 9 302 F 9 302 23 Connect both sides of the Speaker Cable respectively F 9 303 F 9 303 ...

Page 1043: ...9 9 9 143 9 143 24 Pass the Speaker Cable through the hole of the Right Rear Cover 1 and close the cover 25 Pass the Speaker Cable to Cord Guide and install the 3 Cord Guide covers F 9 304 F 9 304 ...

Page 1044: ...lity Voice Navigation Settings and make sure that Voice Guide from Speakers is displayed Operation Check During use 1 Press reset key 3 secs or more 2 Press Main Menu in Control Panel 3 If the display in panel screen is boxed with red frame Voice Guidance Kit is available If Voice Guidance Kit doesn t properly operate check the below Enter Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY VERSION and check whether lang...

Page 1045: ...stalling Caution To install the Card Reader C1 the Card Reader Mounting Kit B1 is required Checking the Contents Card Reader C1 1 Card Reader Unit x 1 2 Screw RS tight M4X10 X 1 3 Toothed washer x 1 CD Manuals China RoHS Instruction Sheet F 9 305 F 9 305 ...

Page 1046: ...Card Reader Relay Unit x 1 4 Connector Cover x 1 5 Card Reader External Relay Harness x 1 10 Screw TP M3X6 x 4 6 Cord Guide x 2 7 PCB Spacer x 1 9 Screw TP M4X12 x 2 8 Wire Saddle x 1 CD Manuals China RoHS Instruction Sheet Turning OFF the Host Machin Refer to the host machine installation Turning OFF the Main Power F 9 306 F 9 306 ...

Page 1047: ... the card number to be used in service mode on this equipment COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD otherwise the card cannot be recognized even though it is inserted 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Right Upper Cover will open simultaneously F 9 307 F 9 307 2 Open the Right Rear Cover Unit1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover Unit 1 1 Screw RS tight M4 2 Screws TP M3 1 Claw Claw x3 F 9 308 F 9 308 ...

Page 1048: ...e Saddles 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 309 F 9 309 5 Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable x2 Control Panel Communication Cable USB Cable F 9 310 F 9 310 6 Remove the 2 screws and open the 2 grips x2 Grips F 9 311 F 9 311 ...

Page 1049: ...rness F 9 312 F 9 312 8 Remove the 2 screws and the upper screw of Blanking Cover from the Main Controller PCB 1 Removed screw is used in the procedure 10 x3 Blanking Cover F 9 313 F 9 313 9 Remove the screw and remove the PCB Spacer Removed screw is used in the procedure 12 PCB Spacer F 9 314 F 9 314 ...

Page 1050: ...r x3 F 9 315 F 9 315 11 Install the connector of Card Reader External Relay Harness F 9 316 F 9 316 12 Install the Connector Cover 1 screw screw removed in step 9 Caution Install it in the position where the tie wrap of Card Reader External Relay Harness is inside the Connector Cover F 9 317 F 9 317 ...

Page 1051: ...neously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly Grips x2 F 9 318 F 9 318 14 Install the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable 15 When the Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable MEMO Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cabl...

Page 1052: ...it 1 and install it 1 Screws RS tight M4 2 Screws TP M3 1 Claw 1 Wire Saddle x3 Wire Saddle F 9 320 F 9 320 17 Close the Right Rear Cover Unit 1 Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover 18 Remove the Jumper from the connector of Card Reader Unit Removed Jumper will not be used F 9 321 F 9 321 ...

Page 1053: ...Saddle F 9 322 F 9 322 20 Remove the 2 Blanking Seal from the Reader Right Cover Blanking Seal F 9 323 F 9 323 21 Install the Card Reader Installation Plate rear to the host machine 2 Screws TP M4X12 x2 F 9 324 F 9 324 22 Connect the Card Reader External Relay Harness to the connector of Card Reader Unit 1 Connector 1 Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Connector F 9 325 F 9 325 ...

Page 1054: ...r 4 Screws TP M3X6 CAUTION Do not pinch the harness x4 F 9 326 F 9 326 24 Remove the 2 covers of Cord Guide F 9 327 F 9 327 25 Remove the backing paper of Cord Guide and put it in the 2 places indicated in the figure 26 Remove the face seal and install the wire saddle Cord Guide Wire saddle F 9 328 F 9 328 ...

Page 1055: ...main power switch After that go through the procedure from step 1 1 Service Mode 2 Select COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD and enter the card number to be used 1 to 2001 Input the minimum card number to be used by a user 1000 cards from the inputted number can be used 3 To enable the setting value turn OFF ON the main power switch 4 Insert the card with the registered card No and make sure that it is ...

Page 1056: ...9 9 9 156 9 156 Copy Tray J1 Checking the contents 1 Copy Tray x 1 Turning OFF the host machine Refer to the host machine installation Turning OFF the main power F 9 330 F 9 330 ...

Page 1057: ...emove the Right Delivery Frame Cover with flat blade screwdriver 2 Claws x2 claw F 9 331 F 9 331 2 Install the Copy Tray 2 Claws F 9 332 F 9 332 3 Connect the Power Plug into the outlet 4 Open the switch cover and turn ON the Main Power Switch ...

Page 1058: ...F ON the main power switch 4 Select Settings Registration Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings and check that Delivery Tray Settings menu is added 5 Select either tray B or C to copy and perform test copy 6 Check that the paper is output in the Copy Tray 7 Reset the tray in accordance with the user s request ...

Page 1059: ...ner 2way Tray X1 2 Insert pin X1 3 Screw TP M3X6 X1 4 Second Delivery Full Detection Lever X 1 Not used in this Installation procedure Turning Off the Main Power Switch Refer to Turning OFF the Main Power Switch in Main Unit Installation Procedure F 9 333 F 9 333 ...

Page 1060: ...he host machine 1 Screw TP M3x6 F 9 334 F 9 334 3 Insert the Inner 2way Tray to 2 slots of the Delivery Assembly and hook it to the slot of the Inner 2way Tray Support MEMO Insert the Inner 2way Tray to the slot of the Delivery Assembly and hook it to the Second Tray Support so that boss is inserted to the Inner Rear Cover 1 Caution Check that the Inner 2way Tray Unit is inserted to the Inner 2way...

Page 1061: ...ver and turn ON the Main Power Switch Setting after installation 1 Service Mode 2 COPIER OPTION ACC IN TRAY and set 1 3 Turn OFF ON the main power switch 4 Settings Registration Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings Output Tray Settings and check that menu is added 5 Select copy to the Tray B and perform test copy 6 Check that a copy is delivered to the Inner 2way Tray 7 Set the tray in a...

Page 1062: ...king the contents 1 Expansion RAM x 1 Pre Check 1 Check the memory capacity Service Mode COPIER DISAPLAY ACC STS RAM 2 Exit the service mode Turning OFF the Host Machine Refer to the host machine installation Turning OFF the main power F 9 337 F 9 337 ...

Page 1063: ... Claws x2 x5 Claws Rubber Caps Rubber Caps F 9 338 F 9 338 2 If the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable F 9 339 F 9 339 3 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw 1 Hook hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 340 F 9 340 4 If FAX is installed disconnect the FAX cable F 9 341 F 9 341 ...

Page 1064: ...9 9 9 164 9 164 5 Hold the grip and remove the Main Controller PCB 2 2 Screws x2 Grip F 9 342 F 9 342 6 Install the Expansion RAM F 9 343 F 9 343 ...

Page 1065: ...h sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 2 is installed properly x2 Grip F 9 344 F 9 344 8 Install the removed cover and the cable Connect the FAX cable If the FAX is installed Install the Left Rear Sub Cover Install the Reader Communication Cable if the Reader is installed Install the Left Reader Cover 9 Connect the Power Plug to the Outlet 10 Open the switch cover and turn ON th...

Page 1066: ...9 9 9 166 9 166 Checking after installation 1 After adding the Expansion RAM check that the memory capacity is increased Service mode COPIER DISAPLAY ACC STS RAM 2 Exit the service mode ...

Page 1067: ...Interface Kit A1 beforehand The following Removing Main Controller PCB 1 there are 3 procedures based on the installation combination Expansion Bus F1 IPSec Security Board B2 Wireless LAN Board B1 Reference for installation Be sure to refer to To install Expansion Bus F1 and IPSec Board B2 at the same time Be sure to refer to To install Expansion Bus F1 and Wireless LAN Board B1 and IPSec Board B2...

Page 1068: ...late 1 3 PCB Spacer 3 4 Screw TP M3 6 5 1 2 1 This is used when connecting the IPSec Board B2 2 2 out of 5 screws are used IPSec Board B2 1 IPSec Security PCB 1 2 Wireless LAN Auxiliary Plate 1 3 Screw TP M3 6 2 Not used CD Guides FCC IC Instruction Sheet for UAS only F 9 345 F 9 345 F 9 346 F 9 346 ...

Page 1069: ...ead Unit x 1 7 MFP Antenna x 1 11 Screw TP M3x6 x 5 8 Antenna Tape x 1Sheet 4 Wireless LAN Auxiliary Plate x 1 5 Wireless LAN Support Plate x 1 3 PCI Bus Expansion PCB x 1 9 Wireless LAN Indication Label x 1 10 Cord Guide L90 x 3 6 Wireless LAN Support Plate x 1 F 9 347 F 9 347 ...

Page 1070: ...tape as it might be needed for later use 2 Not used 3 3 out of 5 screws are used CD Guides Users Manual Wireless LAN User Manual CD Sheet FCC IC UAS only Turning the Host Machine OFF Be sure to refer to How to Disconnect the Main Power in the Host Machine installation ...

Page 1071: ... Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 Screw RS Tight M4 2 Screws TP M3 Claw in 1 place Claw x3 F 9 349 F 9 349 4 If Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 Connectors 1 Wire Saddle 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 350 F 9 350 5 Remove the USB cable and Control Panel Communication Cable x2 Control Panel Communication Cable USB Cable F 9 351 F 9 3...

Page 1072: ...9 9 9 172 9 172 6 Remove the 2 screws open the grip in 2 places x2 Grips F 9 352 F 9 352 7 Hold the grip in 2 places remove the Main Controller PCB 1 while avoiding the removed harness F 9 353 F 9 353 ...

Page 1073: ... the Main Controller PCB 1 and install the 3 PCB Spacers 3 Screws removed screw will be used in step 3 x3 F 9 355 F 9 355 3 Install the PCI Bus Expansion PCB by inserting it to the connector of the Main Controller PCB 1 3 Screws screws removed in step 2 x3 F 9 356 F 9 356 4 Install the IPSec Security PCB by inserting it to the connector of the PCI Bus Expansion PCB 2 Screws TP M3x6 in the IPSec Bo...

Page 1074: ...B 1 is installed properly Grip x2 F 9 358 F 9 358 6 Install the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable 7 If Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable MEMO Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles B A F 9 359 F 9 359 8 Install the...

Page 1075: ...oard B2 in the same time Caution Points to note at installation Be sure not to install incorrect Wireless LAN Support Plate F 9 360 F 9 360 Caution Points to note at installation For the Bulk Head Unit be sure to install the flat surface of the terminal assembly facing upward F 9 361 F 9 361 ...

Page 1076: ...te when installing Be sure to install the PCI Bus Expansion PCB to come under A part of PCI Expansion Support Plate x2 PCI Bus Expansion PCB PCI Expansion Support Plate A F 9 363 F 9 363 3 Insert the Wireless LAN Board to the connector of the PCI Bus Expansion PCB and install it in PCI Expansion Support Plate 1 Screw TP M3x6 in the Wireless LAN Board B1 contents F 9 364 F 9 364 4 Remove the Cover ...

Page 1077: ...ion Kit Content 3 Screws the removed screws will be used in step 6 x3 F 9 366 F 9 366 6 Install the PCI Expansion Support Plate assembled at step 3 in the Main Controller PCB 1 3 Screws use the screws removed in step 5 Caution Do not tuck the Fan Cable when installing the PCI Expansion Support Plate x3 F 9 367 F 9 367 ...

Page 1078: ...rd B1 Contents Caution Do not tuck the Fan Cable when tightening the screw of Wireless LAN Support Plate x4 F 9 368 F 9 368 8 Insert the terminal of Bulk Head Unit into the indicated position MEMO Make sure that the terminal is securely settled F 9 369 F 9 369 MEMO To install the IPSec Security Board perform step 9 to 11 If IPSec Security Board is not to be installed perform from step 12 ...

Page 1079: ...n the IPSec Board B2 contents upside down and install the Wireless LAN Auxiliary Plate in the Wireless LAN Board B1 content 2 Screws use the screws removed in step 9 IPSec Security PCB Wireless LAN Auxiliary Plate x2 F 9 371 F 9 371 11 Install the IPSec Security PCB by inserting it to the connector of the PCI Bus Expansion PCB 2 Screws TP M3x6 in the IPSec Board B2 contents x2 F 9 372 F 9 372 ...

Page 1080: ... 1 is installed properly Grip x2 F 9 373 F 9 373 13 Install the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable 14 If Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable MEMO Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles B A F 9 374 F 9 374 15 Install t...

Page 1081: ... from the back side Make sure that A part overlaps with B line 60mm MFP Antenna Antenna Tape A B F 9 375 F 9 375 19 Remove the cover of the 3 Cord Guide F 9 376 F 9 376 Caution Points to note at installation Be sure to affix the Cord Guide 25 mm from the Right Rear Cover 1 Cord Guide 25mm Right Rear Cover 1 F 9 377 F 9 377 20 Peel off the paper liner and install the Cord Guide F 9 378 F 9 378 ...

Page 1082: ...Cover 1 insert the connector of MFP Antenna to the terminal of the Main Controller PCB 1 1 Wire Saddle Right Rear Cover 1 Wire saddle Connector F 9 380 F 9 380 MEMO Be sure that the slack of the MFP Antenna Cable is in the backside lower part of the Host Machine F 9 381 F 9 381 23 Affix the Wireless LAN Indication Label F 9 382 F 9 382 ...

Page 1083: ...Network Confirm Network Connection Set Changes turn it ON 4 Settings Reristration Preference Network and select TCP IP Settings 5 Be sure that IPSec Settings is displayed When Wireless LAN Board has been already installed 1 Insert the Power Plug in the outlet 2 Turn ON the main power switch 3 Settings Reristration Preference select External Interface 4 Be sure that Extension Card Settings is displ...

Page 1084: ...Service Tools General Circuit Diagram General Timing Chart User Mode Backup Data Appendix ...

Page 1085: ...ng the machine Tool name Tool No Ctgr Appearance Remarks Digital multimeter FY9 2002 A Used as a probe extension when making electrical checks Door Switch TKN 0093 A Tester extension pin FY9 3038 A Tester extension pin L shaped FY9 3039 A Use for electrical checks CA 7 test Sheet FY9 9323 A Used for adjusting checking images ...

Page 1086: ...ce tool 1 of this are enclosed at shipment of the host machine Tospearl 240 FY9 6007 000 B ITB Cleaning Blade Lubricant Mirror positioning tool FY9 3040 040 B Used for positioning mirror mounts Reference Category A Must be kept by each service engineer B Must be kept by each group of about five engineers C Must be kept by each warkshop T 9 10 T 9 10 ...

Page 1087: ...ve areas Mineral oil family lithium soap Molybdenum disulfide MO 138S Tool No CK 0427 500 g can Lubricating oil Mineral oil paraffin family Tool No CK 0524 100 cc Lubricating oil Lubrication e g drive areas friction areas Silicone oil Tool No CK 0551 20 g Lubricating oil EM 50L Lubrication e g gears Special oil Special solid lubricating agent Lithium soap Tool No HY9 0007 Lubricating oil Lubricati...

Page 1088: ...on sensor Registration motor Fixing inlet sensor Fixing delivery motor First Second delivery motor First delivery sensor Fixing motor Fixing heater Drum motor M Pre exposure LED M Primary charging AC bias M Developing DC bias M Developing motor M Primary transfer bias M Primary charging DC bias M Laser M Developing AC bias M Drum motor C Pre exposure LED C Primary charging AC bias C Developing DC ...

Page 1089: ...nner motor Bk Developing motor Bk Image formation system Primary charging DC bias Bk Laser Bk Developing AC bias Bk Cassette 1 pickup motor Cassette 1 pickup solenoid Cassette 1 pre registration sensor Registration sensor Registration motor Fixing inlet sensor Pickup feed system First Second delivery motor First delivery sensor Fixing motor Fixing system Fixing heater Drum motor Bk Secondary trans...

Page 1090: ... 5 4 3 2 J1022 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1021 2 3 1 J1020 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J5010M 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J5006M 1 3 2 J5087M MT2 SOLD6 1 3 2 J5087F 2 3 1 J5007M 2 3 1 J5007F 4 1 2 3 J5012L MT1 2 1 6 5 4 3 J426 3 4 5 6 1 2 J5008F MT5 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J834 FT7 MT3 1 6 5 4 3 2 J5010F 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J5006F 11 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J431 1 3 2 J1012 3 4 5 6 1 2 J1008 2 1 J866 1 2...

Page 1091: ... 1 4 3 2 J424 1 3 2 J301 2 1 J302 2 3 1 J650 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 J423 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J211 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 J129 1 3 2 J801 1 2 J5080F 2 1 J5080M 3 4 5 6 1 2 J691 2 3 4 1 J413 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 1 J421 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 8 1 J808 2 1 J701D J701DH 1 2 J5082L 1 2 J5082D J5082DH 2 3 4 1 J5081M 1 4 3 2 J5081F 2 3 4 1 J427 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J428 1 2 J805 3 2 1 J6122D 1 2 3 J6124D J6124LH 3 2 1 J6122L J6122LH 1 2 3 ...

Page 1092: ...MUX1 HVSEL_HV2_MUX0 I2C_SDA I2C_SCL PEDE_RESET PEDE_CST2M_CLK PEDE_CST1M_CLK PEDE_EX_CLK PEDE_EX_S2M PEDE_EX_M2S SHUKUTAI_MODE SIG_RMT_24VDCP DRM_RD_HEAT_OFF ZEROX_IN J5044LH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 J5044L J3002DH 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 J3002D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 1 1 J104 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 2...

Page 1093: ...7LH 7 6 1 5 4 3 0 1 9 8 2 J5037L 21 0 2 1 1 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J125 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 1 0 2 21 J203 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J202 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 J103 3 2 1 1 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J5071L J5071DH J809B_ 0 8 MT24 J809A 4 1 ...

Page 1094: ...864 J863 J853 5 4 3 2 1 J6166 1 2 3 4 5 J6165 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 J871 5 4 3 2 1 J6160 1 2 3 4 5 J6159 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 J867 1 8 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J862 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 19 18 17 J825D J825LH 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 9 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 8 1 18 17 J825L 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 19 18 17 J82...

Page 1095: ... 1 2 3 J6017 6 5 4 3 2 1 J6015 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J303 11CSR 8PK N 1 2 2 1 1 2 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 J6012 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 J6011 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 J6016 2 8 9 3 4 5 1 6 7 J6014 2 8 9 3 4 5 1 6 7 J6010 7 6 1 5 4 3 9 8 2 J307 1 2 3 4 5 6 J6013 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 J306 2 8 9 3 4 5 1 6 7 J6009 1 2 J6007L 2 1 J6006L 1 ...

Page 1096: ...2 3 J6044 3 2 1 J6043 1 2 3 J6042 2 8 9 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 4 5 1 6 7 J660 3 2 1 J6152 3 2 1 J6041 1 2 3 J6040 3 2 1 J6039 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 J659 1 2 3 J6151 1 2 3 J6038 3 2 1 J6037 1 2 3 J6036 3 2 1 J6033 3 2 1 J6035 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J5035 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J5022L 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J5019L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J5016L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J5022D 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J5023 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J5021L J5021LH J5018LH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J501...

Page 1097: ...29L 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J312 7 6 1 5 4 3 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 9 8 2 J5079L J5079LH 2 8 9 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 3 4 5 1 6 7 J5079D J6003LH 1 2 3 4 J6004L 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 J5029D 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J5030L J5030LH 3 2 1 J6046 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 J5030D 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J6025 J6004DH 4 3 2 1 J6004D 4 3 2 1 J6003L 7 6 1 5 4 3 7 1...

Page 1098: ...64DH 3 2 1 J6064D 1 2 3 J6064L 3 2 1 J5057L J5057LH J5058DH 3 2 1 J5058D 2 1 J5056L 1 2 J5041LH J6093 3 2 1 J5041L J5056DH 2 1 J5056D 2 8 9 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 3 4 5 1 6 7 J5055D 1 2 3 J6076 1 2 3 J5058L J5108LH 1 2 3 J5108L 1 2 3 J6095 2 1 J5055LH 2 1 J6073L 1 2 J6073D J6073DH 3 2 1 J6075 2 1 1 2 7 6 1 5 4 3 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 9 8 2 J5055L 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 ...

Page 1099: ...6080LH 3 2 1 J6080L J5028DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 J5028L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 J5028D 3 2 1 J6171 1 2 3 J6080D J5054DH 1 2 3 J6099 J5099DH 2 8 9 3 4 5 1 6 7 J5099D 3 2 1 J6077 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J5068L 3 2 1 J5054L 1 2 3 J6087 1 2 3 J6085 3 2 1 J6086 J5068DH 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 J5068D 1 2 3 J5054D 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 1100: ...1DH 1 2 J5061D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 J5036L J5012DB_ 0 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 J5036D 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J42L J5060DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 J5060D J5012LA J5012LWH 7 6 1 5 4 3 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 9 8 2 J216 2 8 9 0 1 3 4 5 1 6 7 J42D 2 8 9 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 3 4 5 1 6 7 J5026D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ...

Page 1101: ... 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 1 7 1 J5048L 1 7 9 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 J5048D 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J215 J5049LH 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J5049L 1 2 3 4 5 6 J6157 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 J6060DH 1 2 3 4 J6060D 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 J6057L 6 5 4 3 2 1 J6158 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 1 7 1 J207 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J218 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J214 15 14 13 12 11...

Page 1102: ...9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 J5050D 1 2 3 4 J605 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J5051L 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 J601D J755DA J755DB 1 2 3 J6148 3 2 1 J606 J6111DH 3 2 1 J6111D J755L J755LB J755LA J755DB_ 0 15 J755LB_ 0 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J600 2 1 3 2 1 J6115 1 2 3 J601 1 2 3 J6117 3 2 1 J603 ...

Page 1103: ... 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 J5040D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 J235 1 2 J6133L 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J5064L J5064LH J5065LH 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J5065L J6133DH 1 2 J6133D 1 2 3 J6129 1 2 3 J6132 1 2 3 J6131 1 2 3 J6130 1 2 J6138L 1 2 J6138DH 1 2 J6138D 1 2 3 J6027 1 2 3 J6029 1 2 3 J6028 1 2 3 J6030 1 ...

Page 1104: ...5 6 7 1 J4001 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J8003 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J8202 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J8006 2 3 1 CN1M 2 3 1 J8002 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 19 18 17 J1 17 18 19 16 15 14 13 12 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J8007 2 8 9 0 1 3 4 5 1 6 7 J8308 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 J8309 7 6 1 5 4 3 0 1 9 8 2 J8302 7 6 1 5 4 3 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 9 8 2 J3001 TEN_KEY TTP HUB SUBKEY UNIT Inverter PC...

Page 1105: ...1 2 3 J6173D J6174DH 1 2 3 J6172 2 1 G4FAX board G1 W LAN Option A IPSEC Option SATA FLASH CCM 10 3S RS Conv Copy card reader ISOLDE A IA L IRIGOLETTO A CARMEN A CL4 Debug SRAM MINERVA MDS FRAM Counter DDR2 DIMM DDR2 DIMM DDR2 DIMM GIOVANNI A GU short ORFO A 00 EMU EFI F Link EFI I F image PRESS A EFI controller option EFI controller embedded EFI controller server R CON YON RIZER PCI Bridge option...

Page 1106: ...scription Device Information DeliveryAvailable Screen at Startup Main Menu Quick Menu Copy Scan and Send Send Fax Fax Scan and Store Access Stored Files Fax Ifax Inbox Secured Print Web Browser Workflow Composer Remote Scanner Print Server Mobile Print Scan Lock Analyzer Introduction to Useful Features No Open Status Monitor Cancel On Off No Default Screen Status Monitor Cancel Default Status Type...

Page 1107: ... Auto Sleep Time 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 min 1 hour 90 min 2 3 4 hours Yes Sleep Mode Energy Use Low High Yes Weekly Timer Settings Sunday to Saturday 00 00 to 23 59 in one minute increments Yes Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings 00 00 to 23 59 in one minute increments Yes Network If you are configuring the settings for the first time in Interface Settings TCP IPv4 Settings TCP IPv6 Settings or Settings Co...

Page 1108: ...s DNS Settings DNS Server Address Settings IPv4 Primary DNS Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Yes Secondary DNS Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Yes IPv6 Primary DNS Server IPv6 Address Yes Secondary DNS Server IPv6 Address Yes DNS Host Domain Name Settings Yes IPv4 Host Name 47 characters maximum Yes Domain Name 47 characters maximum Yes IPv6 Use Same Host Name Domain Name as IPv4 On Off Yes Host Name 47 charac...

Page 1109: ... On Off Yes Use Authentication On Off Yes User User name for FTP server login 24 characters maximum Yes Password Password for FTP server login 24 characters maximum Yes Multicast Discovery Settings Response On Off Yes Scope name Scope name to be used for a multicast discovery 32 characters maximum Yes Use HTTP On Off Yes Use Web DAV Server On Off Yes SSL Settings Functions using SSL encrypted comm...

Page 1110: ...Key Method Digital sig Method Yes Auth Encryption Algorithm Auto Manual Settings Yes IPSec Network Settings Validity Time 1to65535minuites 480minuites Yes Validity Size 1to65535 MB 65535 MB Yes PFS On Off Yes Auth Encryption Algorithm Auto Manual Settings Yes Connect Mode Transport display only NetWareSettings Yes Use NetWare On Off Yes Frame Type Auto Detect Ethernet II Ethernet 802 2 Ethernet 80...

Page 1111: ...tly mounted form Change forms as needed Minimize form changes across print queues Minimize form changes within print queues Yes NPrinter Settings Print ServerName 64 characters maximum Yes Tree Name 32 characters maximum Yes Context 256 characters maximum Yes Printer Number 0to254 0 Yes AppleTalkSettings Use Apple Talk On Off Yes Phase Phase 2 fixing Service Name 32 characters maximum Yes Zone 32 ...

Page 1112: ...t User MIB Access Permission Security Settings Authent Algorithm Authent Password Encryption Algorithm Encryption Password Yes Delete Yes Context Settings Context Name 32 characters maximum Register Context Name 32 characters maximum Yes Edit Yes Delete Yes Dedicated Port Settings Dedicated Port Settings On Off Yes Use Spool Function Use Spool Function On Off Yes Startup Settings Startup Settings ...

Page 1113: ...er Send Filter Yes Use Filter On Off Yes Default Policy Allow Reject Yes IPv4 Address Up to 16 IPv4 addresses can be stored Yes Receive Filter Use Filter On Off Yes Default Policy Allow Reject Yes IPv4 Address Up to 16 IPv4 addresses can be stored Yes IPv6 Address Filter Yes Send Filter Use Filter On Off Yes Default Policy Allow Reject Yes IPv6Address Up to 16 IPv4 addresses can be stored Yes Reci...

Page 1114: ...ge Quality Default Setting Item Setting Description Device Information Delivery Available Auto Adjust Gradation Quick Adjust Press Start Full Adjust Automatic after the machine prints and scans four sets of test pages No Correct Density Copy Scan and Store Mail Box Black Send Scan and Store other than Mail Box Color Send Scan and Store Other Than Mail Box Light Dark 1 to 9 levels 5levels No Correc...

Page 1115: ...the number of output trays in the host machine and client machines is the same 3 Indicates items that cannot be used with the default setting Also the Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES is necessary Contact your local authorized Canon dealer Item Setting Description Device information DeliveryAvailable Paper Feed Settings Paper Drawer Auto Selection On Off Copy Printer Access Stored File Receive...

Page 1116: ... No 3 Tray Home Position Tray A Tray B Off No 3 Offset Jobs 1 On Off Yes Job Separator Between Jobs On Off Yes Job Separator Between Copies On Off No Different Paper Sizes for the Output Tray On Off No Unfinished Tab Paper Forced Output On Off Yes Print Settings Print Priority Copy 1 2 3 Yes Printer 1 2 3 Yes Access Stored File Receive Fax Other 1 2 3 Yes Text Photo Priority When ACS Is Set to Bla...

Page 1117: ...Scan Lock Yes Mail Box Do Not Set Forced Secure Watermark Forced Document Scan Lock Yes Printer Do Not Set Forced Secure Watermark Forced Document Scan Lock Yes Printer Driver Watermark Doc Scan Lock Do Not Set Printer Driver Secure Watermark Printer Driver Document Scan Lock Yes Adjust Background Character Contrast Black Cyan Magenta Print Settings Test Print No Standard Value Settings No Relativ...

Page 1118: ...round Image Level Data Size Priority Normal Image Quality Priority Yes Format PDF to PDF A On Off Yes Optimize PDF for Web On Off Yes Rights Management Server Settings 3 Copy Default Settings Item Setting Description Device Information Delivery Available Register Edit Favorite Settings Register Edit Delete M1 to M9 Check Content No Change Default Settings Register Initialize No Register Options Sh...

Page 1119: ...t appears only if the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board is installed in addition to installing the Super G3 FAX Board 5 Indicates item that appears only if the Super G3 3rd 4th Line Fax Board is installed in addition to installing the Super G3 FAX Board Item Setting Description Device Information Delivery Available Print Report No TX RX User Data List Print No Fax User Data List 1 Print Common Settings ...

Page 1120: ... Yes I Fax On Off Yes File On Off Yes Always Add Device Signature to Send 1 On Off Yes Restrict File Formats On Off Yes E mail Ifax Settings Register Unit Name 24 characters maximum No Communication Settings SMTP Receive On Off Yes POP On Off Yes SMTP Server Server name or IP Address 48characters maximum No E mail Address 64 characters maximum No POP Server Server name or IP Address 48characters m...

Page 1121: ...Address Book No Change Default Settings Register Initialize No Register Options Shortcuts Shortcut 1 Density No Settings No Shortcut 2 Original Type No Settings No Shortcut 3 2 Sided Original No Settings No Shortcut 4 Different Size Originals No Settings No Register Sender Name TTI 01 to 99 Register Edit Delete No ECM TX On Off Yes Set Pause Time 1 to 15seconds 2seconds Yes Auto Redial On Off Yes ...

Page 1122: ... Board Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board and Super G3 3rd 4th Line Fax Board are installed Line 1 Priority TX Prohibit TX Line 2 Priority TX Prohibit TX Line 3 Priority TX Prohibit TX Line 4 Priority TX Prohibit TX No TX Start Speed 33600 bps 14400 bps 9600 bps 7200 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps Yes PIN Code Access On Off Line1 On Off Yes Line2 8 On Off Yes Line3 9 On Off Yes Line4 9 On Off Yes Confirm Entered ...

Page 1123: ...ooter On Off Yes YCbCr RX Gamma Value Gamma 1 0 Gamma 1 4 Gamma 1 8 Gamma 2 2 Yes Handle Files with Forwarding Errors Always Print Store Print Off Yes Forwarding Settings Receive Type Validate Invalidate Register Registered Forwarding Settings Forward w o Conditions E Mail Priority Details Edit Delete Print List Yes 1 1 Receive Tray Settings Set Fax I Fax Inbox Set Register Confidential Fax Inboxe...

Page 1124: ...ettings Mail Box No 00 to 99 No Register Box Name 24 characters maximum Yes PIN Seven digits Yes Time Until Document Auto Delete 0 Off 1 2 3 6 12 hours 1 2 3 7 30 days No URL Send Settings Yes Print upon Storing from Printer Driver On Off Yes Initialize No Settings for All Mail Boxes Time Until Document Auto Delete 0 Off 1 2 3 6 12 hours 1 2 3 7 30 days No Print upon Storing from Printer Driver On...

Page 1125: ...inations Register New Dest Details Edit Delete Search by Name Yes Register Address List Name Register Name Yes Register One touch Register Edit Delete Yes Change Default Display of Address Book Local LDAP Server Remote No Address Book PIN Seven digit number Yes Manage Address Book Access Number On Off Register LDAP Server Receive Type Validate Invalidate Register Details Edit Delete Forward w o Co...

Page 1126: ...l Totals Large2 Count Management No Allow Printer Jobs With Unknown IDs On Off Yes Allow Remote Scan Jobs With Unknown IDs On Off Yes Allow Black Copy Mail Box Print Jobs On Off Yes Allow Black Printer Jobs On Off Yes Device Management Default Settings 1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached Item Setting Description Device Information Delivery Availab...

Page 1127: ... Functions When Security Key is Off Partial Functions All Functions Yes Confirm Device Signature Certificate Certificate Details Certificate No Check User Signature Certificate Certificate Details Certificate No Certificate Settings Certificate Settings Generate Network Communication Key Key Name 24 characters maximum No Key Algorithm RSA Display only No Key Length bit 512 1024 No Start Date of Va...

Page 1128: ...ature Algorithm Issue Destination Start Date of Validity End Date of Validity Issuer Public Key Cert Thumbprint Certificate No Delete No Certificate Settings Register Key and Certificate Register Key Name 24 characters maximum Password 24 characters maximum No Delete No Certificate Settings Register CA Certificate Register No Delete No Display Asterisks For Confidential Info On Off Yes Display Sta...

Page 1129: ...ear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached Item Setting Description Device Information Delivery Available HDD Data Complete Deletion Timing of Deletion During Job After Job No Deletion Mode Overwrite Once With 0 Null Data Overwrite 1 Time With Random Data Overwrite 3 Times With Random Data DOD Standard No Initialize All Data Settings Initialize No TPM Settings Backup TPM Key Rest...

Page 1130: ...D Clear Clear Yes Remote UI Import Export PC Button information in Quick Menu HDD Clear Clear Yes Remote UI Import Export PC Restrict Quick Menu HDD Clear Clear Yes Remote UI Import Export PC Setting items for Main Menu Button settings in Main Menu HDD Clear Clear No Button settings on the top of the screen HDD Clear Clear No Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu HDD Clear Clear No Other settings for Ma...

Page 1131: ...CON Clear Yes Service mode COPIER FUNCTIO N SYSTEM RSRAMBUP HDD 1 Following data cannot be backed up Timer Energy Settings Adjust Time Date Time Settings Network SNMP Settings Use SNMP v 3 User Settings Context Settings 2 Following data cannot be backed up Receive Forward Common Settings Forward Settings Fax I Fax Inbox Settings 3 Following data cannot be backed up User Management Department ID Ma...

Search results

Summary of Contents for IMAGERUNNER ADVANCE C5045

Reviews:

Related manuals for IMAGERUNNER ADVANCE C5045

Brands by name

Popular brands

Canon IMAGERUNNER ADVANCE C5045, Service Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for IMAGERUNNER ADVANCE C5045

Reviews:

Related manuals for IMAGERUNNER ADVANCE C5045

Brands by name

Popular brands